Home

8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual

1. 23 2 2 5 3 Changing Network Properties 24 2 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen s c esocu llle 24 2 4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount llle 24 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 13 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Preparing The 8525 For Operation 2 1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation Typically 8525 vehicle mounts are configured at the factory and arrive ready for use Although the 8525 is equipped with an internal Compact Flash a PCMCIA slot and SD I O slot these slots are not intended for user modification If a device needs to be changed or added in these slots contact qualified Psion Teklogix personnel Refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the service number closest to you 2 2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 2 2 1 Switching The 8525 On To switch the 8525 on e Press the lt ENTER ON gt key A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Windows CE NET logo appears When Windows CE has successfully loaded the startup desktop is displayed AN Note The screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end This is part of the normal Windows CE NET cold boot process The desktop is displayed after a few moments 2 2 2 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 The most common 802 11b settings are configured as defaults However there are some fields that must be co
2. This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer 174 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Applications Default Colours 04 Default Colours Range p Black see text Background White see text Foreground And Background This menu is used to select the foreground and background colours used within Tekterm If an unreadable combination is assigned the foreground and background have the same value the foreground colour will be inverted The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black KL Note The 8525 must be reset press and hold down the BLUE and ENTER keys for a minimum of six seconds in order for the new colour assignments to take affect 6 00 Applications TESS and ANSI applications require unique names so that several different sessions of TESS and ANST can operate simultaneously 8525s can support up to 8 sessions at one time 03 Applications Range Typel 1 ANSI None ANSI TESS Titlel 1 parts see text Settings 1 see text Typel 8 None Titlel 8 Settings 8 AN Important These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing F4 the SAVE key Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Compu
3. Ole PP 2 3 anchor EA 4 E CD Y au 8 11 8 9 Scan See Viewport LLLI 10 C 0 To enter negative values press the minus key and then type the number you want to use The LEFT arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned to the parameter Each time the LEFT arrow is pressed the number is decremented by one For example to enter a value of 5 start from zero and press the left arrow key five times Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 223 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport Follow Cursor When the Follow Cursor parameter is disabled set to N the cursor is always assumed to be located at the origin Using the previous example e the area displayed will be 4 9 2 0 to 4 9 9 2 0 1 or after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80 0 2 to 4 3 Wraparound When Wraparound is enabled set to Y the Scan See display is treated as a one line by 20 column display rather than 2 lines by 10 columns Panning If Panning is disabled set to N the Scan See viewport does not move when the cursor moves one position to the right and the pivot is still inside the Scan See display However the Scan See display is updated to reflect the changes within that viewport If the pivot goes o
4. Bluetooth Device O Virtual Key CANCEL D O Eunction MBUTTON Mouse O Macro BACKSPACE O Force Shifted grams e O Force Unshifted RETLIPK No Force il Start TekTem Control Panel zzKeyboardProperties SA i alloy Figure 5 15 Remapping A Key Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode Note The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function And Macro The radio buttons along the side of the dialogue box allow you to define what the scan code will be remapped to Virtual Key Function or Macro When Virtual Key is selected you can choose to force lt SHIFT gt to be either on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialogue box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialogue box e Choose Virtual Key Function or Macro e Choose a function from the Function list in the dialogue box and tap on OK 78 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Volume And Sound Properties Editing A Scancode Remap To edit a scancode e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit e
5. Task Manager Ctrl Panel Active Tasks PTXWLAGS46B1 Switch To End Task Cancel L1TPL A amp jstat TekTerm PTKWLAGS4651 is Figure 4 12 Task Manager Supervisor 4 4 5 Settings e Tapon Settings to display a sub menu of options TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 1 Display Menu gt rs Desktop a Security dar 7 Programs Shortcuts gt un rr3 amp Settings amp Control Panel A JSt 1 gt AM FE Figure 4 13 Settings Sub Menu Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware the operating system and the shell If your 8525 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm application or another application additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel 56 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Run Network And Dial Up Connections The Network and Dial up Connections window allows you to configure the 8525 radio or execute an existing configuration Refer to Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 on page 15 for radio setup details Taskbar And Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialogue box in which you can customize the taskbar choosing which options will be displayed Refer to Customizing The Taskbar on page 49 for additional details about this option 4 4 6 Run Choosing the Run option from the Start M
6. o o 246 8 4 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 246 8 4 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 248 85 Internal Lithium Ion Battery o o 250 Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices AJ Technical Support o iesea d raw aa A 1 AZ Product Repairs gt 2 ga ale a ai ox Ro o A 1 AS Worldwide O ICES s 2 2 su aras xU eR we a A 2 Appendix B Port Pinouts B Tether Port Pinout gt e sea amei sar dd Heb a B 1 B 2 RS232PortPinout es sels eA B 1 B3 DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout aaa a B 2 Appendix C USB Setup Application CL USB Setup use aa a a ewe Ix Rak C 1 C 1 1 Launching The Application 0 C 1 C 1 2 Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf C 2 C 1 3 Installation Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC C 4 C I4 Post Installation 22s o Rm gs C 5 6 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENTS Microsoft s End User License Agreement You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by Psion Teklogix Inc from Microsoft Licensing Inc or its affiliates MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by interna tional intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed
7. A2 Product Repairs International For technical support outside of Canada or the U S A please contact your local Psion Teklogix office listed on our worldwide website http www psionteklogix com Click on the heading labelled Contacts to choose a Psion Teklogix technical support representative closest to you Canada U S A Canadian and U S customers can receive access to repair services by calling the toll free number below or via our secure website see Technical Support above L Note Customers calling the toll free number should have their Psion Teklogix customer number or trouble ticket number available Voice 1 800 387 8898 press option 2 Fax 1 905 812 6304 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual A 1 A 3 Worldwide Offices COMPANY HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Inc 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Tel 1 905 813 9900 Fac 419058126300 Email salescdnQpsion com NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U S SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Corp 1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard Suite 500 Erlanger Kentucky USA 41018 Te 41859 371 6006 Fax 1 859 371 6422 Email salesusa psion com INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES see also www psionteklogix com Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Tel 33 4 42 90 88 09 Fax 33 4 42 90 88 88 E mail
8. MIC IN Microphone input MIC GND Microphone signal ground Speaker positive Speaker negative GND Signal Ground ol A OY B 0 N USB_HOST_PORT_4 PLUS for connecting external devices such as key boards mice printers USB_HOST_PORT_4 PLUS for connecting external devices such as key boards mice printers 10 GND Signal Ground 11 USB DEVICE PLUS For connections to USB Hosts such as computers 12 USB DEVICE NEGATIVE For connections to USB Hosts such as com puters 13 14 15 16 GND Signal Ground USB HOST PORT 3 PLUS For connecting external devices such as keyboards mice printers USB HOST PORT 3 NEGATIVE For connecting external devices such as keyboards mice printers GND Signal Ground 17 CONSOLE RXD Console Port RS 232 Receive Data Internal use only 18 CONSOLE TXD Console Port RS 232 Transmit Data Internal use only 19 GND Signal Ground B 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Appendix B Port Pinouts DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout A Signal And Description 20 CONSOLE TXD SEL Transmit data Select selects whether the PCON or PXA 255 CPU is sending data out the CONSOLE TXD pin Internal use only 2 MOTION DETECT Alternate input blanks the screen for the period that this pin is grounded usually implemented via ext
9. e Press lt CTRL gt lt S gt again if you want the status message to appear only during transmit lock H The message should look similar to the sample below V6 0 fld 0 6 V6 0 is the TESS version number fld indicates that TESS is currently in field mode Insert and replace mode are represented as ins and rep respectively The number 0 6 indicates the response time of the last transmission in seconds Press CTRL T to display the unit number instead of the TESS version number Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 143 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Lock Messages 6 7 1 Lock Messages When information is transmitted to the host computer the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the 8525 receives a reply A locked state is indicated by either LOCK B base or LOCK H host in the lower left corner of the display When the reply is received by the 8525 the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again 6 7 8 Control Commands A group of lt CTRL gt key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the 8525 will operate under a variety of conditions lt CTRL gt lt P gt Reprints the last print page sent from the host This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the 8525 vehicle mount lt CTRL gt S Displays the 8525 status continuously Below is a sample status li
10. Tab stop mode When this parameter is disabled set to N the setting and clearing of horizontal tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page When enabled set to Y horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line Edit extent This parameter selects the extent of the display to be affected by the ICH and DCH controls and received character insertion The possible values are Line Area Display or Fld The shifting caused by ICH DCH and character insertion is confined to the selected extent Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 191 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Serial Disp controls When this parameter is disabled set to N any control codes received from the host are performed as described When enabled set to Y any received control functions are displayed and are not performed If any CO or C1 controls are received from the host their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video Other characters are displayed as normal characters This mode can also be set with the Set Mode SM control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu 6 20 1 6 Serial 05 Serial Range Primary Port Any Available see text Secondary Port Any Available see text Async In N Y N Start 0 Ose DO End 0 0 2255 Primary Port amp Secondary Port ANSI print commands such as MC or Media Copy control
11. Bluetooth Device Storage Keyboard Properties Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros Unicode Mapping Scancode Remapping Macro Key Sequence Delete Macro E Ch Cn Wh Important Important an amp Start TekTerm Control Panel Keyboard Properties MX i mU Figure 6 6 Macro Dialogue Box Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 73 for detailed instructions about creating macros For information about using the macro keys you ve created refer to Macro Keys on page 134 6 17 1 2 Indicators When the Indicators parameter is enabled set to Y onscreen indicators are displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 8525 Refer to Onscreen Indicators on page 35 for a list of possible indicators 6 17 1 3 Softkeys Enabling setting to Y the Softkeys parameter displays softkey labels at the bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey To block the display of softkey labels set this parameter to N 164 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Ctrl Panel Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed Refer to Table 6 1 on page 134 for a list of softkey labels 6 17 1 4 Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the i
12. F5 None lt F6 gt lt F10 gt F6 F10 Fl1 F11 ESC F12 F12 BS lt F13 gt F13 LF lt F14 gt F14 lt F15 gt Help lt F16 gt Do lt F17 gt lt F20 gt F17 F20 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 147 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Block Mode Local Editing Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key lt F21 gt Find lt F22 gt Insert Here lt F23 gt Remove lt F24 gt Select lt F25 gt Previous Screen lt F26 gt Next Screen lt F27 gt lt F36 gt None Table 6 2 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 6 8 4 Block Mode Local Editing The Psion Teklogix 8525s support block mode or Local Editing Application programs must be specifically written to support this mode For software that supports this mode the keys shown in Table 6 3 have special meaning Key Function lt ENTER gt Starts transmission of data Function keys Start transmission of data Move cursor to the next unprotected position in the ASTON keys appropriate direction lt SHIFT gt lt RIGHT gt arrow Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area lt SHIFT gt lt LEFT gt arrow Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves lt DEL gt m cursor one position to the left CLR Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to the first position in the area Table 6 3 Function O
13. Storage Stylus Syst Start 3 Control Panel Regional Settings Figure 5 71 Translation Dialogue Box Input This value is compared with the decoded bar code reading If there is a match the Output string is translated into the decoded bar code Output Leli gt Keyboard Remove Programs If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding Input string the decoded bar code will be translated into the Output string This string entry parameter can be null or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters e g function keys ENTER etc Type The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines what is compared with the decoded bar code reading the beginning of decoded bar code the end of decoded bar code the entire decoded bar code or anywhere within the decoded bar code default TEKTERM APPLICATION 6 1 TheTektermApplication s s ss ass ecs o o o e 133 6 2 Additional Keyboard Functions o o o o e 133 6 2 1 Function Keys And SoftkeyS o llle 133 6 2 1 1 FUNCION Keys os gage eg ek oe RR ee A 133 6 2 1 2 Softkey Function Keys llle 134 6 2 2 Macro Keys sis e ncaa e xus maor e ed WR ea be ORA Ros 134 6 3 Changing The Screen Font Size o o 135 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents o o e 135 6 5 The Task Manager Switchin
14. To force connection to a specific existing network highlight the network to which you want your 8525 to connect and tap the Connect button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 A Make New Serial C4 Connection on CON Encryption WEP This tab lists available networks any access points that are broadcasting an SSID and it lists preferred networks networks that you have config ured Since access points are generally secure they will most likely not be listed here By default the 8525 attempts to connect to preferred net works This behaviour can be changed by enabling V Automatically connect to non preferred networks in the Advanced dialogue box page 23 e To add a new configuration double tap on the Add New item listed with the networks A blank Wireless Properties dialogue box is displayed Wireless Properties File Edit View MARA e E 4 1 Network name SSID sample 7 This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Authentication Open y Network key 12345 Key index fi The key is provided automatically V Enable 802 1X authentication EAP type Tus y i i Start TekTerm Network Connections JPTXWLAGS46B1 i 5 Figure 2 5 Wireless Properties Dialogue Box Network name SSID e Type the appropriate SSID Service Set Identifier in the Ne
15. changing the offset will take affect only after the 8525 display has been updated Version Scan See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 8525 than older units The Version numbers represent the following unit versions Value Scan See Version 0 First LED version up to serial number 1594080275 these are encased in grey plastic 1 Model 7000 LED units versions after the serial number above these are also encased in grey plastic 2 e Metrologic 7000M LCD units these are encased in grey plastic e Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units these are encased in black plastic Table 6 6 Scan See Versions L Note To interface the 8525 to the Scan See units with older firmware serial number lower than 1594120224 set Parity space all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 225 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Keyboard Mapping um 3 2 Scan See Keyboard Mapping Digits 0 9 are passed verbatim e The CLR key forces a sign on message and display refresh This only occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed then released e The three F keys are mapped to Fl F2 and F3 respectively e The ENT key is mapped to the carriage return character e The two arrow keys are handled locally an
16. Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support A E 9 d d c I e 2 amp 9 Mouse Narrow Bandi Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional B Dial up Co Connection Settings M amp 3e L System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp S Eu ui 5 amp 3 4 Figure 3 3 Stylus Icon e Select the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button Ele view i D5 Double Tap Calibration Options Bluetooth If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you Device e A may need to recalibrate your screen v Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the 2 center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center Mouse and then lift the stylus To start tap Recalibrate Remove orage ylus SKIGOIX Ota kecal Volume Wireless co Programs Manager Scanners Sounds WAN amp jStart TekTerm si Control Panel a Stylus Properties isd all Figure 3 4 Calibration Screen e Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen 3 6 8525 Indicators 8525s use LEDs Light Emitting Diode onscreen messages and audio tones as indicators 3 6 1 LEDs The 8525 is equipped with four tri coloured LEDs This section outlines what these LEDs indicate A Important Ifan LED is illuminated in red the operator should be cauti
17. Figure 5 49 Call Options 8 In the Modem dialogue box select the Next gt button to display the Phone Number dialogue box File Edit View m ETT El Al GPRS network Make New Serial C4 Connection on CON Country region code f Area code 425 Phone number eos e Ix Force long distance Start_ TekTerm amp Network Connections ise Figure 5 50 Setting The Phone Number The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent Once you ve specified all the necessary information choose the Finish button 106 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 9 Inthe Control Panel choose the Dialing icon File View 2 x O O L A 9 y gt f Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support gt 1 8 A amp A J Mouse Narrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional i Radio iDia up Co Connection Settings o w Mp Jo L Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Start c Control Panel Eun will Sis 3 Figure 5 51 Dialing Icon 10 The values in the Dialing Properties dialogue box need to be edited accord ing to your network carrier specifications File View p x 9 Dialing Prope OK x El Lx Bluetooth Mon board Device e Local settings are T 2 The local area code is 25 Dialing Patterns Tut N
18. Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the 8525 Windows CE NET device Refer to the following website for step by step information about setting up this connection http www microsoft com WindowsXP pro using howto gomobile remotedesktop default asp 5 2 Pocket PC Compatibility The 8525 supports the AYGShell API set that allows PocketPC compatible applications to run on the vehicle mount Microsoft Windows CE NET 4 2 is designed to include application programming interface API compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in 8525s running Windows CE NET 4 2 The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 based applications and Windows CE NET 4 2 based devices http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dncenet html WINCENET CEPCC App asp 5 3 The Control Panel The Windows CE NET Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a variety of system wide properties such as mouse sensitivity network configuration and the desktop color scheme L Note If you are uncertain how to move around a dialogue box and make selec tions review Using A Dialogue Box on page 58 When the 8525 boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed and an
19. TekTerm JJ Network Connections is Figure 5 47 Setting Up The Modem 6 Inthe dropdown menu labelled Select a modem choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialogue box The 8525 communicates with your phone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialogue box The 8525 then disconnects File Edit Device Properties 2 x sl Port Settings call Options Connection Preferences Make New 9 Manual Dial user supplies dial Connection strings usr supp Baud Rate FEE Data Bits e y Terminals B Use terminal window Parity none E before dialing Stop Bits it oA n1 Use terminal window after dialing Elow Control Hardware y Start TekTerm 82 Network Connections Device Properties i alll gt Figure 5 48 Port Settings Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 105 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 7 Under the Call Options tab turn off Cancel the call if not connected within and press lt ENTER gt to save your changes e Ex Device Properties Port Settings Call Options Make New Connection 20 seconds Wait for credit card tone lo seconds Extra Settings special modem commands may be inserted into the dial string AAA A gt gt 4 Start TekTerm s Network Connections _ Device Properties i al
20. To edit a label Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function L Note The number of allowable characters in a softkey label is dynamically calculated based on the screen size and the number of softkeys the unit supports Colour Override L Note This menu is available only if the 8525 is equipped with a colour display 06 Colour Override Range y Foreground Black see text Background White see text Foreground And Background When Colour Override is set to Y the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the ANSI sessions These colour settings will override the Default Colours set from within the View Manager menu Refer to Default Colours on page 175 for details The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black 6 20 1 3 Xmit Modes 05 Xmit Modes Range Xmit Count 99 One 0 99 Xmit Wait 1 0 999 Dev Attr 262 1 2 6c see text Auto Answer see text T dot X Y N Block Mode see text 184 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Xmit Count This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the 8525 before being transmitted to the host If 0 zero is
21. insert mode 190 208 match fields 38 replace mode 190 208 serial I O fields 138 Serial In Out 203 size 118 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual transmit on 739 video attributes 83 207 visible match 199 Fields parameters for TESS Settings 206 Fill Chr 200 Fixed Field Overhd 2 fixed fields 138 F Keys function keys 226 FKEY0 39 2 4 2 6 Flow Control 2 9 Follow Cursor 224 font Default Font 7 82 208 Font Change 68 Font Override 1 74 Foreground amp Background Colour Override 184 198 Foreground amp Background Default Colour 175 Format Effector Transfer Mode FETM 187 form feed CTRL L 189 forward host number fh 752 forward remote number fr 152 fr forward remote number 752 Fujitsu Host 2 2 Full Ascii 177 Func Key Remap ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Function Keys 32 133 softkeys 134 Function keys 147 ANSI equivalents 147 auto reply mode 200 completing a data field 39 entering data 208 executing procedures from the local menu 745 FKEYO0 39 3274 Telnet 2 4 FKEYO0 39 5250 Telnet 2 6 Label F1 F10 changing 183 197 Open Fky Only 208 serial I O 204 G GATM Guarded Area Transfer Mode 187 Global Positioning System Unit 232 GPRS bluetooth 103 Index GPS Unit 232 Group ANSI Auto Term 177 194 H helpdesk 4 hidden fields match 799 H Match Chr 799 HOME 31 32 HOME Key 31 32 host multiple hosts 745 selecting a host 145 switching between hosts 207
22. lt Home gt key Cursor moves to the first input field on the screen 6 7 5 Data Entry The 8525 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer The following actions cause the 8525 to transmit e Pressing a function key or the lt ENTER gt key which is considered to be lt FO gt causes the 8525 to transmit e Completing data entry into a transmit on entry field also causes the 8525 to transmit There are several ways to configure the 8525 vehicle mount to complete a data field e Pressing ENTER after entering data e Pressing a function key after entering data e Pressing an arrow key after entering data e Filling an auto tab field Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 139 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 6 1 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in the table below Field mode Press lt CTRL gt f to enter field mode In this mode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field In field mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys do not perform any functions Pressing the UP or DOWN arrow key completes the entry field and then moves the cursor to the previous or next field Fcursor mode Press lt CTRL gt u to enter fcursor mode In this m
23. y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed x origin and y origin The x origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored The y origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored 6 20 2 9 Emulation L Note These parameters are only accessible when one of the following TESS Host Conn options is selected 2392 Telnet 3274 Telnet or 5250 Telnet 2392 Telnet Emulation 05 Emulation Ranges Send CR with Fkey N Y N Features see text Send CR with FKEY A function key press generates a string of text to be sent back to the host If this parameter is enabled a carriage return is appended to the function key Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 209 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Features 2392 Telnet 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 Clear Entry Fields When this parameter is set to Y an empty entry field is created in place of an
24. 7 1 External Bar Code Readers 7 1 1 PowerScan Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners The 8525 supports Psion Teklogix PowerScan M industrial bar code scanner with standard long range and extra long range options To connect this scanner to the 8525 attach the device to the tether port Before using the bar code reader you may need to change some parameters For details review Scanner Properties Setup on page 114 and Bar Codes on page 117 1 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader L Note For helpful scanning tips refer to Scanning Techniques on page 38 When a label is scanned successfully the 8525 will beep if configured appropriately and the scan LED will flash Occasionally the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read properly In this case use the keyboard to enter data from the label 1 2 Bluetooth Peripherals If the 8525 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio it is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals including GSM GPRS handsets scanners printers and so on The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 8525 is limited to between 2 and 5 meters Psion Teklogix provides built in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below e GSM GPRS tri band universal handset e Bluetooth printer Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 1 1b radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the 8525 includes features to minimize interference performance of the s
25. Changing The Screen Font Size c esos ea caa oo e 135 Panning The Screen Contents o o o o oo oo o 135 The Task Manager Switching Between Applications 136 The Tekterm Status Area ea seoa doe o oo e e 137 TESS Bmiulation secs seruo a a a aes 137 6 7 1 Configuration eA 138 6 7 2 Working With Multiple Sessions l l ln 138 6 73 The bield Lyp sSz c x cs exo E x ADS exu e eds 138 6 7 4 IBM 53250 Emulation Keys llle 139 6 75 Data Baty hose eem a SEI Gee DE 139 6 7 6 TESS Status Message lee 143 6 7 7 Lock Messages o cons eek ark re pow e are Gece 144 6 7 8 Control Commands ss soes ee ooo 144 6 7 9 Resetting A TESS Session o o o e 144 6 1 10 The Local Menu 2032 ies a RO a m 145 6 7 11 Selecting Another Host Computer 145 6 7 120ueung Mode se xicos xx eee ae eas 146 ANSIEmulation 224 eer e 146 6 8 1 Configuration eA 146 6 8 2 Sending Data To The Host o oo 147 6 8 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 147 6 8 4 Block Mode Local Editing ln 148 6 8 5 Working With Sessions o o 149 The Radio Statistics Screen oo o 150 6 9 1 802 10 Stats Screen a so cre cerana ria rart 151 6 9 2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen o 152 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 153 Working With
26. Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 or off to disable it Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data 122 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration UPC And EAN Settings Addendum Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON Refer to Addendum on page 121 Prefix Suffix Chars See Prefix Suffix Chars on page 122 5 9 2 5 UPC And EAN Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC And EAN or off to disable it Field Size Char Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 6 UPC A Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A or off to disable it Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled set to ON the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data Addendum A Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON Refer to Addendum on page 121 Prefix Suffix Chars Refer to page 122 for details Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 123 Chapter 5 Config
27. Host ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Host TESS Connection Type 195 Host Char Set 193 Host Connection ANSI 177 TESS 195 Host echo mode 788 host select CTRL h 744 host terminal number of session tn 152 I VO fields 138 IATA 2of5 126 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 139 ICD DCH controls displaying 797 IEEE radio configuring 15 Ign Bcode fld 208 Include Check 20 121 123 125 126 Include Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 25 Include Check Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology 25 Include Chk 777 122 124 Include Country 120 Include Number Sys 1722 123 Include Sym Code 128 119 incrementing parameters 154 156 Indicators 164 indicators LED functions 33 modifier keys 36 onscreen 35 power AC 36 radio signal quality 36 scanner message 38 security level 36 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 7 Index 8 status area 137 task bar 48 inf usbstor installing C 4 usbstor updating C 2 wceusbsh installing C 4 wceusbsh updating C 2 Infrastructure network 18 initialized messages transmitted 802 IQv1 xi See xi transmitted initialize messages 151 Initial RTT 7 63 228 Input 727 input bar code only fields 138 bar code reader 237 VO fields 203 Input tmo 220 insert mode 1 90 208 Open Fky Only 208 Output tmo 220 replace mode 190 208 serial I O 204 serial I O fields 138 Serial In Out 203 Input Tmo 220 Insert mode 740 insert mode 190 208 INS Key 51 installation 8570 cables to devices
28. NEXT B indicates that the 8525 has data to transmit to the base station NEXT H indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission Unlike lock messages Next messages do not lock the keyboard Keying is allowed while Next messages are displayed While queuing mode may improve apparent response time it can present difficulties to hosts that are operating in real time It should only be used after careful consideration of the host environment The 8525 must be configured for queuing mode see the Queuing parameter on page 201 Additional information on queuing can be found in the TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem Manual 6 8 ANSI Emulation The Psion Teklogix 8525 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes 6 8 1 Configuration To configure the 8525 for ANSI mode the Name and Type of session in this case ANSI must be specified in the Applications menu This menu is described in the section titled Applications on page 175 Next a unique number must be assigned using the Terminal parameter This number should be unique across the entire system that is each 8525 and each application session in each 8525 across your system must have a unique number assigned This parameter is described in the section titled ANSI Settings on page 176 Once the 8525 is configured an ANSI ope
29. Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf C 1 2 Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf 1 Welcome Dialogue Box You can click on the lt Back gt and lt Next gt buttons to navigate between the pre install windows At any time during the pre installation process you can tap on lt Cancel gt to exit the program E Psion Teklogix USB Setup x Welcome This program will attemptto configure your computer so that it may connectto a Psion Teklogix device via USB Itis highly recommended that you shut down all applications before continuing Build 11231 TZ Cua e Shut down all other software programs especially ActiveSync to avoid a restart request during installation e Tap on the Next button The program checks that ActiveSync is installed and that it is a supported version 3 1 or later If the version installed on your PC is not supported you ll need to exit the USB Setup application and install a later version of ActiveSync 2 Device Driver INF File Selection Dialogue Box This dialogue box allows you to choose the paths of the appropriate inf files Default file paths are provided in this dialogue box E Psion Teklogix USB Setup x mem 0000 a This program will make copies ofthe installation scripts inf files forthe following class of drivers and update the copies with information specific to Psion Teklogix devices To choose different scripts click B
30. Y or N e Tap the stylus on the sub menu arrow gt to display the sub menu 6 11 1 4 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set e Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through the options 6 11 1 5 String Entry Parameters You ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields Refer to String Entry Parameters on page 156 for details 6 11 2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus e Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the current menu The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video 6 11 2 1 Sub Menus The character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu e Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display e Press Fl the NEXT menu function key Returning To The Previous Menu e Press F2 the PREV function key or e Press lt ESC gt Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 155 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Numeric Parameters N 6 11 2 2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video To increment or decrement a number
31. but older applications assume serial ports are COM When using COM as the port name the Bluetooth manager will try to find and use a free port between COM7 and COMO When using BSP as the port name BSP2 to BSP9 are available for use The port is available as soon as it is activated EL Note The CH column shows the RFCOMM channel of the service IF the service is RFCOMM based This information is not generally needed except for debugging purposes The Authentication and Encryption options can be changed only before activation To change those after activation deactivate the service first then change the options Once a service is activated all the information regarding the service including the RFCOMM channel number is saved in the registry Some remote devices may change their RFCOMM channel numbers when they reboot so your saved setting may not work when the remote device is rebooted In that case you must deactivate the service and reactivate it to detect the current RFCOMM channel Chapter 5 Configuration The Server Tab Set PIN PINs can be set for each device by pressing the Set PIN button in the Devices tab or you can skip this step and try to connect to the device first N Important The remote device must have authentication enabled otherwise the PIN authentication will fail Highlight a device click on the Set Pin button and type the PIN You will receive a message either that the PIN has been successful
32. e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys or e Type the desired number in the field Negative values are entered by typing a minus sign and then the number e Press ENTER Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed 6 11 2 3 Y N Parameters Y N parameters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable a Y N parameter e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key once or e Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow gt gt appears next to the Y or N 6 11 24 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys 6 11 2 5 String Entry Parameters Important For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys refer to Macro Control Panel on page 164 A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter When a string entry parameter contains data it is displayed in reverse video Empty fiel
33. installing executing or displaying the Software Software means software documentation and any fonts accompanying this License whether on disk in read only memory on any other media or in any other form You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software If the Software is licensed for concurrent use you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently The Software is licensed as a Shareware version on one computer only You may use the Software distributed and licensed as Shareware on a trial basis only The shareware version of the Software may be distributed freely without any associated fees to other parties who wish to try the software as long as the Software is distrib uted within an exact copy of the original MDC self extracting installation file In other words nothing may be left out of the Shareware as distributed on MDC s web site at http www mtghouse com Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Ill IV License Agreement All permanent licenses are prepaid and the Software is licensed to you by MDC You own the media on which the Software is recorded but MDC and or MDC s licensor s retain title to the Software The Software and any copies which this License authorizes you to make are subject to this License Permitted Uses and Restrictions This License allows you to install and use the Software on a sing
34. not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT PSION TEKLOGIX INC FOR INSTRUC TIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLER ANT PSION TEKLOGIX INC HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETER MINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND MS HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOGIX INC TO CONDUCT SUFFI CIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUIT ABLE FOR SUCH USE e NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is pro vided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATIS FACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual l Il License Agreement INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRAN TIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON MS Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for pro grams written in
35. o tings Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp rosca 0500595 OOC 1 amp jStart fTekTerm 2 Control Panel IF Stylus Properties Sissy Figure 5 24 Disabling The Touchscreen e Tapthe stylus on the checkbox next to V Disable the touch panel The touch screen will not accept screen taps 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment e n the Control Panel choose the Certificate icon File View x oN L A 9 y gt E Bluetooth Certificates g Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support t 2 0 4 amp 9 1 ES Mouse Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional i Dial up Co Connection Settings VQ o Y Wn Qe Remove Storage System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp n Tits a ec nee 00 0L A amp Start_ Control Panel uw will E E 3 Figure 5 25 Certificates Icon 84 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Narrow Band Radio This dialogue box is used in conjunction with 802 1x authentication to enhance 8525 security Certificates 7 x Stores Bluetooth Trusted Authorities Class 2 board Device Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority A Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 2 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Lists the certificates Equifax Secure Certificate Authority Mouse i Bional J trusted by you Glo
36. tekeuro psion com A 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual D APPENDIX Port PINOUTS B Tether Port Pinout The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner decoded scanner RS232 serial and USB interfaces In order for it to operate a special wiring scheme is needed If you need to create cables for the tether port contact Psion Tek logix and request an instruction sheet for tether port termination A Important Do not attempt to interface with the tether connector without direction from a qualified Psion Teklogix technician Doing so may cause damage to the 8525 and or the tethered device B RS232 Port Pinout Pin a No Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect RXD Receive Data TXD Transmit Data DTR Data Terminal Ready GND Signal Ground DSR Data Set Ready RTS Ready To Send CTS Clear to Send 09 5V POWER co A DA MT B t N CAUTION If enabled software configurable 5V power will appear on this line which may be the Ring Indicator line on some devices such as modems 1 2 Amp Max Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual B 1 Appendix B Port Pinouts DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout B 3 DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout Pin No Signal And Description 1 EXT_5V_SW Configurable 5V power for External devices such as USB 1 2 Amp max EXT_5V_SW Same as above
37. 11 2 Cleaning The 8525 A j Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the vehicle mount unit e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning e To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 43 Working With Winpows CE NET 4 1 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 45 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 45 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard o o 46 4 2 Working With Files Folders And Programs 47 4 3 The Startup Desktop e 47 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons o e i 48 4 3 2 The Taskbar i 2 44 929 69 RR RR em m Roe RR E s 48 4 3 2 1 UsingTheTaskbar o 49 4 3 2 2 Customizing The Taskbar 49 44 The Start Menu 2s noe orem RR eR a a E A 50 4 4 1 TheDesktop o cs core ea eoo RR 50 4 4 2 Security Levels e 51 Th System Trays oo 22 4 Re 6o Bw rp S xx ESE ex ua 55 The Task Manager rs 56 Cycle Tasks amp 2o os ed eee om RU ee Rd A 55 4 44 3 Progr mS 2 loo o o EEE He om m dS RR Rs 53 AAD SEINES i o gon e Res oral wok oe a a He EG ae ed 56 44 6 Run wh eee ee de eee eR See ee a De eee ES 57 4 4 7 Shutdowt 4 24 5 408554 488 04 5 Be BAe Ae Ra
38. 237 integrated scanner option 37 Intensity 7035 backlighting 70 72 Interleaved 2 of 5 724 Internet Explorer 55 Intl EBCDIC 272 215 IP address assigning 2 IP for SysReq 2 2 ISM band Bluetooth radio 97 ITF Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 125 ITF Check IATA 2 of 5 symbology 126 ITF Check 12 of 5 symbology 124 I2 of 5 Short Code 715 K Kbd lock 786 Kbd Locked 202 Kbd Modes 188 190 keyboard compatibility with VT220 ANSI keyboard 147 disabling the keyboard 190 function keys 147 Kbd modes 188 190 key repeat 70 72 lock 186 202 lock messages 144 one shot mode 72 Keyboard Tekterm 764 keyboard backlight 32 keyboard keys 29 ALT 31 arrow keys 31 BKSP 37 BLUE key 30 CTRL 37 DEFAULT key F3 134 DEL 31 END 31 ESC 31 Function keys 32 HOME 31 32 INS 31 LITERAL key F5 134 Macro keys 32 macro keys 73 134 164 modifiers 29 navigating using the keyboard 46 NEXT key F1 134 one shot mode 72 ORANGE key 30 PREVIOUS key F2 134 SAVE key F4 134 SHIFT 30 softkeys 134 SPACE 31 TAB 3 keyboard mapping Scan See 226 Keyboard Properties 70 72 backlight 72 one shot mode 72 Key Index assigning 20 Key Repeat tab 77 keys emulation keys IBM 5250 739 transmit key 186 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual L Label F1 F10 783 197 labels changing softkey Label F1 F10 197 labels changing softkey Label F1 F5 183 LANAccessUsingPPP service Bluetooth 99 launching DOS 153 Parameters m
39. 6 14 Display Options s x loser ewe a e a Ma ee a ws 160 6 15 More ParameterS lh 161 6 16 Radio Parameters uu e Roe le la Kio a 161 6 17 System Parameters sce yo cee ee ee om d o ow OR UR e 163 6 17 L Keyboard pe tenos me s bet aoa ee a XO x Ry Xs 164 6 17 1 1 Macro Control Panel llle 164 6 17 1 2 Indicators 2 2 2 oo X mom p RIED 164 6 17 13 SOftkeyS 2 42 on RR o Re y RR 164 6 17 1 4 Ctrl Panel Ce ic a hw Se ea eR eC a 165 6 17 2 Audio 4 qox ud Rer ir amp A KE eS deae x Rs 165 6 17 3 PowerMgmtCtrlPanel a 167 6 17 4 User Permissions e 167 6 17 5 Auto Stari 2 2262 bee ee ee ee Re OEY EL eR Y OR we 168 6 18 Scanner Control Panel ee ee 168 6 19 View Manager 2 s 169 130 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 19 1 Split SCr m i aaa A RU 170 6 19 1 1 Splitting And Displaying Screens ln 170 6 19 1 2 Moving Between Split Screens o o 171 6 19 1 3 Toggling Between Full amp Split Screens 171 6 19 1 4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card 172 6 19 2 Custom Characters UnicodeTM Lo o 172 6 19 2 1 Creating A Unicode Character o 172 6 19 2 2 Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window 173 6 20 Applications x29 oe ease AAA 175 6 20 1 ANSLSettgs uo Soa bea Ron MESI E 9 Wo X 4o es 176 6 20 11 Host Conn us ay SA E eee REPOS a 177
40. 620 1 2 Screens e svo koe RO y Ee Poe ee ee y EO e 181 6 20 1 3 Xmit Modes i e skr a PRORA ch A s 184 6 20 1 4 Kbd Modes llle 188 6 20 1 5 Edit Modes i ls RR eR RUE dex e Re 191 620 16 Serial s e sr sow RV xU He b EN 192 6 20 17 Host Char Setu zm s sos poko em Rn a eim es 193 6 20 1 8 Anchor View llle 193 6 20 2 TESS Settings i29 P xem ork we ee Bas CR SO Se ae 194 620 21 HostConn 2 o ee 195 620 2 2 SCC Hm 196 6 20 2 3 Characters sorg fee bbe eor ee bee ee DE ORES 198 0 20 24 Tests bose a ses ea a ALS eS ioe Ae ER ee 200 6 20 2 5 Features 2 bee bead RS y Ed doe Yo ROO y EO e 201 6 20 2 0 SCanner e doses ae a A CUR rts cti aea 205 6202 7 Fields pes SG Re RES Res RR UE e 206 6 20 2 8 Anchor VIEW soi lo ee a RE 209 620 29 Emulaion leen 209 6 2 Ports Tether And Console o o o oo oo 217 6 21 1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options 217 6 21 2 Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 218 6 21 3 Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters 221 6 21 3 1 Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 221 6 21 3 2 Scan See Keyboard Mapping 0 226 6 22 NETWOLK ee en ee a Oe a Rae ae ee ee a 226 6 22 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings o o oo oo 226 6 22 2 802 10 V2 oe zx eek RR OER Eee weeks SREY xs 227 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 131 Chapter 6 Tek
41. Direct 2392 Telnet 3274 Telnet 5250 Telnet and Narrow Band Settings L Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 1Qv2 is selected as the Conn Type c Settings Range Host see text Port 9999 0 9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format HH HHH HHH HHH Port Port specifies the port number By default the port is assigned the value 9999 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 195 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen 6 20 2 2 Screen m 05 Screen Range of Cols 80 20 132 of Rows 24 4 100 Origin Scroll N Y N Field Scroll N Y N Pages Saved 16 sul App Parameter 0 Heed 9 Label F1 F10 see text Colour Override N see text of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 8525 display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display L Note The value in this parameter must be an even number of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle mount computer s display Dis
42. L Note Auto Term is available when 802 10v2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter page 195 or when 802 10v1 is enabled in the Radio Menu see 802 10 v1 on page 162 When this parameter is set to Y a unique unit number is assigned for the current TESS session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored Group Group Auto Term Range 1 Jj When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal For every application session you create the Terminal assigned must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525 194 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Other applications running in the 8525 such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different number In addition each Psion Teklogix 8525 using the radio link must have a unique number 6 20 2 1 Host Conn Host Conn Range Conn Type 802 10Qv2 See text Settings see text Conn Type For TESS applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections 802 1Qv2 9010t TCP
43. Menus o e 153 6 11 1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 154 6 11 2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus 155 6 11 3 Saving Changes To Parameters o 158 6 11 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values 159 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 159 The Parameters Menu o s o mo lee 159 6 13 1 Security Set ings cre otona a oe llle 160 Display Options o e ecs om ee eos RI y Se om o uo 160 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Contents 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 More Parameters amp 2 2 doe ew Re Ue a xau A Roe qs 161 RadioParameters e ee 161 System Parameters 2 163 6 17 1Keyboard 9 ovo RR RR Rx EE RR ws 164 6 17 2 AUI oes e ura cuts ere achat pr are a Hi RS 165 6 17 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel 167 6 17 4 User Permissions 2 5 uds S Roe ts la 167 6 17 5 Auto Stallone 168 Scanner Control Panel o i seess secs ahed oo o 168 View Manager p sce be sa wee Ba a A Es 169 6 19 1 Split Soren e e ee coros oz o ek 170 6 19 2 Custom Characters Unicode o o o o o 172 Applications x xoci moro A A ee Ros 175 6 20 1 ANSI Settings ee 176 6202 TESS Settings o soe eb ea Wo Sea edb eG wo as 194 Ports Tether And Console o o 00000004 217 6 21 1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Opti
44. Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 126 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration IATA 2 of 5 5 92 14 IATA 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated ITF Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 3 Translations File View 2 AF p i 0 O0 d R Bl 1 Certificates Date Ti IPv6 Keyboard Device Support Properties el Q e 3 9 Mouse Network and Owns Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs e D wy Storage Stylus Syste Change Start pcontolPanel gt i m Figure 5 70 Translation Tab e In the Translation tab choose the Add button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 127 File View Mouse Network and Owl Dial up Co v B y
45. PC to the vehi cle mount again if needed and so on To install ActiveSync follow the step by step instructions provided with the program s setup wizard Refer to the following website for details http www microsoft com windowsmobile resources downloads pocketpc activesync35 mspx EL Note You ll need the USB setup utility to configure the ini file For information about this USB application refer to Appendix C USB Setup Application 3 11 General Maintenance 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen The top of the touchscreen is a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal conductive coating If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen protector PN 1008009 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen mustard e sodium hydroxide concentrated caustic solutions e benzyl alcohol and e concentrated miner acids 42 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Cleaning The 8525 3
46. Profile Restore Selected Profile and Delete Selected Profile Keep in mind however that until a profile is created the only available option is Create Backup Profile Help Files BACK And FORWARD Buttons The BACK and FORWARD buttons allow you to scroll through the help files that provide steps to guide you through the Total Recall operation Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 109 Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile e Tap on the Next gt button to begin the process Profile Information Registry Type indicates what type of Profile Name Default registry type the platform supports Profile Settings Image Psion Teklogix 8525 OS Version 4 20 0 Registry Type Hive registry AutoRestore Profile Settings Profile Location Back E Figure 5 58 Profile Details Profile Information This dialogue box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file e To begin type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name This dialogue box also lists the image type 0 Version and Registry Type for the 8525 e Taponthe icon to expand your settings for AutoRetore Profile and Profile Location ef AutoRestore Profile Settings ef Not an AutoRestore Profile AutoRestore Profile for this device only _ Clone Profile for other devices Profile Location Storage Card Flash Figure 5 59 Profile Options Not an AutoRestore Profile cre
47. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Devices Tab 5 6 1 The Devices Tab File vie Bluetooth Controls gt x Devices servers l Active Conn l Properties 2 Buetooth mans adies Tace fen i Mi Services louse bist ev Set PIN Storage Start Tekrerm control Panel Bluetooth contos gt Amiao Figure 5 40 Bluetooth Controls Dialogue Box Scan e Click on the Scan button to list available devices Eile Viel Bluetooth Controls gt x Devices servers Active Conn Properties m Bluetooth ard Device Pa EFEWELL1 000272B01BBF WindowsCE 00043E4326E2 Mouse ve ams Storage m Start j rekrem 2 Control Panel JBluetooth Controls gt 5E i 107 Wait for the 8525 to complete its scan approximately 20 seconds When scanning starts the Scan button will change to Stop if necessary you can tap on this button to stop the process Once scanning is complete all discovered devices will be displayed in the list box with Name Address Active status and PIN information L Note During the scanning process addresses are located first followed by mE names Only the names of devices that are within the Bluetooth radio cov erage range will be retrieved The Active column indicates whether any service is activated for that device When a service is activated the device is d
48. Settings 2 2 5 1 Rearranging Preferred Networks The 8525 attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialogue box in sequence beginning at the top of the list If you need to rearrange this list of networks move networks up and down in the list e In the networks list tap on the network you want to move up or down in the list To move the highlighted item upward or downward in the list tap the Up or Down button and press ENTER 2 25 Deleting A Preferred Network To delete a network from this list e Tap on the network in the list to highlight it e Tap the Delete button and press ENTER Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Changing Network Properties 2 2 5 3 Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network Highlight the network that you want to modify e Tap the Properties button and press lt ENTER gt e Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialogue box and press lt ENTER gt to save the changes 2 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen Before using your 8525 you will need to calibrate the touchscreen Refer to Calibrating The Touchscreen on page 32 for details 2 4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount A Important Because Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee what has been saved registry after a reset this should be considered as a last resort To reset the 8525 e Press and hold down the
49. Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes e Tap on OK to save your changes Removing A Remap To delete a remap e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab highlight the scancode you want to delete and tap on the Remove button e Tap on 0K 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties AN Note Sounds wave files cannot be reproduced on 8525 units The conditions under which 8525s emit sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit e Inthe Control Panel choose the Volume amp Sounds icon Elle View x 71 n A2 00 7 L 9 9 Fe amp Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support qc 9 d En al 5 1 amp GB 9 Mouse Na rrow BandiNetwork and Owner Password PC Power Regional Radio Dial up Co CONO Settings o v w m 2 U Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall W Volume amp amp Start_ FP Control Pane S uw wl E E 3 Figure 5 16 Choosing The Volume Icon Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 79 Chapter 5 Configuration Volume Adjustments 5 5 3 1 Volume Adjustments Volume amp Sounds Properties o Volume Sounds Bluetooth Loud Enable sounds for Device V Events warnings beeps and system events ry V Applications program specific and all other sounds 2 Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Mouse b
50. Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 247 Chapter 8 Specifications PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Depth of Field Extra Long Range Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Ambient Light Immunity Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock at 23 C Vibration Water and Dust Decoding Capabilities Auto discriminates between Safety Regulatory Electrical Emissions 100 mil 45to 264 in 114 to 671 cm Paper Labels decoded 15mil 28to 60in 71to 152 cm 20mil 28to 72in 71to 182 cm 40mil 28to 144 in 71 to 144 cm 55mil 40to 180 in 102 to 457 Reflective Labels decoded 40mil 40to 180 in 102 to 457 cm 70 mil 80to 300 in 2032 to 762 cm 100 mil 80to 432 in 203 to 1097 cm 2596 minimum 65 55 Artificial light 1200 ft candles Sunlight 8000 ft candles Operating 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 5 to 95 NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete Meets MIL STD 810E IEC529 rating IP54DW UPC A E EAN8 13 JAN8 13 P2 P5 Code 128 EAN add ons Code 128 MSI Plessey Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii Standard 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Complies to Gost R TUV UL cUL Complies to FCC A EN55022 B 248 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Laser Classification Chapter 8 Specifications PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs BCIQCNS13438 AS NZS3548 VCCI B C
51. Telnet 212 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation BRK for Attn When the attention key is pressed a Telnet Break command is generated This command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the attention key press to a host using Telnet LU Name Enabled If enabled set to Y this parameter allows the 8525 to negotiate a specific device name for itself LU Name The value assigned in this field is used when the LU Name Enabled parameter see above is set to Y The current terminal number is appended to the name to generate a unique device name for example LUA00001 Features 3274 Telnet 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392 Telnet Refer to Features 2392 Telnet beginning on page 210 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 213 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEYI 6 23 FKEY24 31 And FKEY32 39 rz 06 FKEYO 7 FKEYO ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 E2 FKEY3 E3 FKEY4 F4 FKEY5 ES FKEY
52. additional details about keyboard navigation 46 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Working With Files Folders And Programs 4 2 Working With Files Folders And LN Ele Edit view Go Favorites x S E adwes wndows E Windows p ov c 5 D tw t Ig Favorites Fonts Profiles Programs Recent StartUp ceconfig h Oo a O a O h s cemgrc exe cetlkit dl cetlstub dl cezcliexe DbGprs csv X enrollexe FTPD tmp qm im x mw m Stat Windows Figure 4 1 Working With Windows Icons Double tap on the appropriate icon either a folder icon a program icon or a file icon to open or launch your selection 4 3 The Startup Desktop When the 8525 boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately L Note The startup folder is located in Windows StartUp and Flash Disk StartUp netmui dll Remote Computer Desktop e la Recycle Bin TekTerm tl Internet Explorer Start Figure 4 2 The 8525 Startup Desktop Double tap on the icon to open a window or in the case of an application icon launch an application Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 47 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET The Desktop Icons 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way
53. amp Start Tekrerm J amp Network Connections _ JPTXWLAGS46B1 i 25 Figure 2 7 Configuring An IP Address EL Note Choosing the Renew button forces the 8525 to renew or find a new IP address This is useful if for example you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your 8525 is dropped from the network Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Name Servers Tab To define a static IP address e Tap the Configure button TEKLOGIX 4 Exec E184 PTXWLAGS46B1 Settings IP Address Name Servers An IP address can be O autornatically assigned to this A computer If your network O Specify an IP address does not automatically assign ghee m um um EN IP addresses ask your network Een administrator for an address Subnet Mask T IT TJ and then type it in the space z l provided Default Gateway ETT TI Supervisor amp Start TekTerm JPTWLAGS4681 i 54 Figure 2 8 Defining An IP Address e Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address 81 Displ A Parame Tap on each field and type an IP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address Tap on OK to save your information 2 2 4 Name Servers Tab L Note If DHCP is enabled name server addresses are assigned automatically e In the IP Information tab tap on the Configure button Figure 2 8 on page 22 is the window from which you choo
54. an additional ground to the vehicle if desired The grounding strap must connect from the ground stud on the 8525 to a solid reliable contact point on the main portion of the vehicle chassis It must not be connected to bat tery negative or a terminal block As with other vehicle cables the routing of the ground strap should be carefully considered to ensure it does not pose a hazard to the operator or the safe operation of the vehicle If necessary secure the ground strap with cable ties or some other mechanical means to prevent loops or loose lengths of wire that could catch on stationary items when the vehicle is in motion 1 4 7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 e Warning The 8525 accepts DC power sources between 10V and 90VDC nom Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the 8525 and will void the product warranty A 1 8 meter 6 ft extension power cable P N 13985 002 std or 001 display off is supplied with your 8525 This cable should be wired to a filtered fused maximum 10A accessory supply on the vehicle The 8525 draws no more than 8A less 1f the accessory supply is greater than 12V Any additional wiring minimum 18 gauge connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 90 VDC 10A When connecting P N 13985 001 display off version ensure that the screen blanking wires clearly labelled and the power wires red black leads are reliably secured away fro
55. appended to the serial input For example entering a value of 1 appends F1 to serial input A value of 0 zero disables this parameter a suffix is not added L Note Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended 0 prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial output Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix S0 suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial output Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix 204 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scanner 0 CRC When this parameter is enabled set to Y a CRC16 value is appended to the serial output message Also when this parameter is enabled set to Y for each control character in the serial output stream a DLE is inserted to precede that character The control character is replaced with its 1 s complement 6 20 2 6 Scanner 05 Scanner Range gt Cont Nxt Fld Y Y N Append Enter Y Y N Append FO Y Y N Mixed AIAG N Y N Rjct if Alpha N Y N Beam Lockout N Y N Cont Nxt Fld This parameter only applies to string entry data When enabled set to Y this parameter allows bar codes that are lon
56. as those displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows My Computer Choosing this icon displays the contents of your 8525 computer If you re not sure how to work with the files folders and programs displayed refer to Working With Files Folders And Programs on page 47 Recycle Bin This option temporarily contains items that were deleted allowing you to either permanently delete or restore these items Internet Explorer Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer a standard Windows CE NET version Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the Network and Dial up Connections icons in the Control Panel Remote Desktop Connection This option allows your 8525 to communicate with a remote desktop PC Remote Desktop Connection on page 63 provides a website with step by step instructions 4 3 The Taskbar y Remote Computer Desktop la Recycle Bin TekTerm n El Internet Evnlaror Estar Figure 4 3 The Taskbar 48 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Using The Taskbar The 8525 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen It displays icons through which you can view the internal battery capacity the radio signal quality of your unit and so on If the vehicle mount is attached to a peripheral device an associated icon is displayed In addition the taskba
57. connection to the device that is running Windows CE NET exists If the install fails due to an unknown error the install for this particular driver is aborted Tf the install fails because there was an inappropriate USB connection there are two possibilities Anappropriate USB connection was never established between the PC and the 8525 running Windows CE NET In this case when an appro priate USB connection with this device exists Windows will automati cally attempt to install the device driver Anappropriate USB connection exists between the PC and the 8525 running Windows CE NET but it has since been severed Windows may or may not attempt to automatically install the device drivers on the next appropriate USB connection A window is displayed where you can tap on Cancel to abort the wceusbsh driver installation and continue It also contains instructions to boot your device into Windows CE NET and establish a USB connection between the device and the PC When you create the appropriate connec tion Windows automatically installs the device drivers The Found New Hardware wizard may appear Your only interaction with this window is to click on the Finish button If this is the first appropriate connect between the device and the PC i e there was no previous devnode for the device in the system the lt Continue gt button is activated as soon as the connection is made Where there was a devnode presen
58. cursor to the next field to the right or downward The lt ESC gt Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialogue box or activity and return to the previous one The lt SPACE gt Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters In a Windows dialogue box pressing the lt SPACE gt key enables V or disables a checkbox The lt HOME gt Key The lt HOME gt key moves the cursor to the top of the form or page The lt END gt Key The lt END gt key moves the cursor to the bottom of the form or page Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 31 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keypad Backlight ELA The lt PgUp gt And lt PgDn gt Keys The lt PgUp gt key displays the previous screen of information The lt PgDn gt key displays the next screen of information Function Keys And Macro Keys In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard no key combination is required and the keys described in this chapter the 8525 keyboard is also equipped with thirty function keys and twelve macro keys Function keys lt F1 gt through lt F30 gt and Macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt can be used with the CE operating system or another application All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application The Tekterm application utilizes these keys Refer to Additional Keyboard Functions on page 1
59. from the host The Auto Answer string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros For example this string can be used to automatically send the username and password when logging into the host Refer to Macro Control Panel beginning on page 164 for additional details about macros Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 185 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes 1 bit When this parameter is disabled set to N the vehicle mount computer transmits 8 bit controls When enabled set to Y the vehicle mount transmits 7 bit controls This parameter applies to character mode block mode and media copy mode Block Mode 06 Block Mode Kbd lock Xmit key FETM GATM MATM SATM TTM EOL chars EOB chars KK AAAZS All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer the serial port and the console port These modes apply to the Block mode Local Editing and the Media Copy function unless otherwise noted Consult the Teklogix ANST Terminal Programmer s Manual for more information Kbd lock When this parameter is disabled set to N the 8525 does not lock the keyboard after a block mode transmission When enabled set to Y the keyboard is locked after a transmission The application program must unlock the keyboard by resetting the Keyboard Action Mode KAM using the Reset Mode RM or Enable Manu
60. is pressed once it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the bottom of the 8525 screen For example if the lt CTRL gt key is pressed ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen Once another key is pressed the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar 3 4 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on A locked modifier key is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar For example pressing the BLUE key twice locks it on it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off Once a modifier key is unlocked pressed a third time the uppercase representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed EL Note The locking function of the ORANGE and BLUE keys can be dis 30 abled so that pressing either of these keys once will lock the keys on If you disable the One Shot function of either of these keys pressing the BLUE and or ORANGE key once will lock the key on Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it off Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 72 for details 3 4 2 The Keys The lt BLUE gt And lt ORANGE gt Keys The BLUE and ORANGE modifier keys provide access to additional symbols and keys These additional symbols and keys are co
61. it is at the right end of the char acter string in this case it erases the character to the left of the cursor When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty and any further lt BKSP gt functions in the empty field result in a key board error beep In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of that field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty i e any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the BKSP key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt BKSP gt Fcursor mode key operates in exactly the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode 6 1 6 TESS Status Message Press lt CTRL gt lt S gt to continuously display the status message in the lower left corner of the screen Insert mode
62. laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated Scan Result Time sec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time sec parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the parameter EN Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger can Good This parameter determines whether or not the 8525 emits an audible scanner beep when a good or successful scan is performed Set this parameter to either ON to enable the beeper or OFF to disable it can Bad This parameter determines whether or not the 8525 emits an audible scanner beep when a bad or unsuccessful scan is performed Set this parameter to either ON to enable the beeper or OFF to disable it Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled the input barcode and the modified translated output bar code are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 115 Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Options Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the
63. lists the Name Address and Type of the currently active connections The table is periodically updated while on display but it can take a few seconds before it reflects the actual list of connections The Type column of the table shows ACL or SCO The Connection list table shows the connections for scanning as well as the service connections gn Note You can change the device name and description of your radio by clicking IS on the System icon in Control Panel which will open the System Properties dia logue box Click on the Device Name tab to access the menu and change your settings Then click on OK Although the name will have changed in the Properties menu in Bluetooth Controls the radio only reads it on boot up For the changes to take effect you must reset the 8525 5 6 4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 1 To connect to the internet using a GPRS phone equipped with a Bluetooth radio begin by setting up the Bluetooth radio The setup information is outlined beginning on page 98 Remember to choose the modem with which you want your 8525 to communicate from the Scan Device list Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 103 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 2 To set up the internet parameters select the Network And Dial up Connections icon from the Control Panel File View gt Lx gt r D D b 9 9 y gt p Q ird gt l Bluetooth Certificates Da
64. maintenance EL Note Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage of the vehicle 1 4 5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles Warning Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous For 8525 installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage ensure the 8525 power connector is mounted in a secure location out of the vehicle operator s reach Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles it is necessary to ensure that the unit s power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator and is not exposed to water or other liquids To accomplish this e Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle away from the vehicle operator s reach perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing e Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material e Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the 8525 vehicle mount 238 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories 8525 Installation In Vehicles 1 4 6 8525 Installation In Vehicles EL Note The metal chassis of the 8525 is equipped with a ground lug located on the underside of the 8525 beside the cable management bar to provide
65. pane of the split screen Moving Between Split Screens on page 171 describes how to move the cursor from one split screen to the next 6 19 1 1 Splitting And Displaying Screens Before splitting the screen you need to determine which applications should appear in each pane of the split screen The available applications are listed in the main Display Menu Each application listed in the Display Menu is preceded by a letter for example Parameters is preceded by an A This letter is used in the View IDs string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding application If you need to display the startup Display Menu e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt To split a screen e With the cursor on the Type parameter use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the types of split screens available The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the Type parameter indicate how the screen will be split for example in the sample screen on page 172 the vertical lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments The screen can also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways 170 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Moving Between Split Screens Once you ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the Type parameter e Use the DOWN arrow key to move the cursor to the View IDs
66. selected the vehicle mount transmits only according to the Xmit Wait parameter If the ANSI block mode features are used this parameter should be set to 99 L Note Ifthe 8525 is not in local edit mode the ENTER arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Count parameter setting Xmit Wait This parameter determines the length of time the 8525 collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second i e a value of 10 represents 1 second If 0 zero is selected the computer transmits only according to the Xmit Count parameter fL Note Ifthe 8325 is not in local edit mode the ENTER arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Wait parameter setting Dev Attr This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string This string can be up to 16 characters long The computer sends this string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control The example shown in the Xmit Modes screen sample on page 184 is the device attribute sent to a VAX identifying the Psion Teklogix vehicle mount computer as a VT220 terminal This parameter may or may not be set depending on the requirements of the host computer Auto Answer This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 8525 as a reply to an ENQ character
67. standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality Warning Itis not recommended that the Manual Select parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance Manual Switch Table e Tap on the Set Switch Table button to display the Manual Switch Table dialogue box Manual Switch Table p ok x Channel List Edit Channel List Figure 5 33 Manual Switch Table This feature is used rarely It is used when the order of channel switching needs to be tightly controlled The values in the Channel column are completed for you with the enabled channels when this dialogue box is opened For each corresponding enabled channel the List column contains 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 values by default If communication quality falls below 4696 only the channels entered in the Manual Switch Table are considered for channel switching The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were entered in the table To configure channel switching order for a particular channel Highlight the channel you want to edit and tap on the Edit Channel List button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 91 Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab Editing The Channel List 04 Selected Channel i Channel Switch List anne Only those channels that are enabled are displayed in the dropdown menus in the Edit
68. suffix SI mode The possible values for this parameter are field the default and command When the SI mode is set to field data received through the serial port is displayed in the serial input fields If you are using serial input fields make sure the SI mode parameter is set to field When SI mode is set to command data received by the serial port is transmitted as Passthrough data to the host L Note Command mode is supported by SDKs but not by emulations Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 203 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features SI prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial input Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix SI suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial input Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix SI CRC This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input When enabled set to Y a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid Also when this parameter is enabled set to Y each time a DLE P 0x10 character is encountered in the serial input it is removed and the character following it will be replaced with its 1 s complement SI Fkey This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want
69. the Powered Sled supply and connects the data lines to the 8525 The GPS unit should be mounted with a clear unobstructed view of the GPS satellites For optimal performance the GPS unit should be mounted in an area that provides exposure to as large a swath of unobstructed sky as possible a vehicle roof is an excellent choice A N Important Keep in mind that some windows have thermal and or UV filter or tint coatings that may shield satellite signals from the GPS receiver Psion Teklogix provides four types of Garmin mounting brackets to secure your GPS unit in position 1 4 Mounting Accessories There are two mounting options for the 8525 e Quick Release Mount includes two adaptor plates quick release and cradle mount along with necessary hardware Kit PN 1008424 Dual Ball and Socket Mount 232 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories 8525 Mounting Recommendations 1 4 1 8525 Mounting Recommendations e Warnings Before mounting an 8525 in a vehicle there are a number of oper ator safety issues that require careful attention An improperly mounted 8525 may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the operator Psion Teklogix strongly recom mends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Cable routing within a vehic
70. the transfer of data to and from the serial and console ports on the 8525 At the 8525 the value assigned at the Primary Port and Secondary Port parameters determines which port the ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary The allowable options are Any Available 1st printer 2nd printer 3rd printer 4th printer lst Serial 2nd Serial 3rd Serial 4th Serial and Disabled Async In When this parameter is enabled set to Y the serial async port is ready to receive input at all times Start End These parameters specify the start and end characters of input received from the serial async port 192 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Char Set 6 20 1 7 Host Char Set The Host Char Set menu allows you to specify a character set in the Lower and Upper character tables 05 Host Char Set Lower ASCII ISO IR 006 Upper DEC Multinational L Note When an 8 bit set is selected from the Lower character set the Upper character set will change to the same value The Upper character set cannot be altered until a non 8 bit value is assigned for the Lower character set To choose Lower and Upper character sets e Position the cursor on the Lower or Upper parameter and press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to display the
71. will send the transmission again Because 8525s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial Round Trip Time is required The 8525 uses the time assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements 228 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual PERIPHERAL DEVICES amp lods 7 1 External Bar Code Readers llle 231 7 1 1 PowerScan M Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 231 7 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader 231 7 2 Bluetooth Peripherals lens 231 T9 GPS Unit s nis uou ako ues xen m Eo Nou a da 232 7 4 Mounting Accessories en 232 7 4 1 8525 Mounting Recommendations 233 7 4 2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 234 7 4 3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount 237 7 4 4 Wiring Guidelines leen 237 7 4 5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles 238 7 4 6 8525 Installation In Vehicles o ooo 239 7 4 7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 o o oo 239 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 229 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories External Bar Code Readers
72. 1 5 6 3 The Properties Tab 5 wo xk momo a Re a 102 5 6 3 1 Active Conn Tab llle 103 5 6 4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone lll 103 3 1 Total Recall s asco a a a a See wd Pts 109 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile o 109 5 7 2 Restoring A Profile i lt s cec ceser eresi tpi nuses 112 5 8 IPVO Supports sas ette eR Be eS er ee eae ee Be 113 5 9 Scanner Properties Setup o e e 114 3 9 1 Scanner Options ss sos sm oe m go RR ok XE podre 114 5 09 2 Bar Codes ss pa be a P Bebe bd he 117 5 9 2 1 Code 39 Settings llle eee 118 5 9 2 2 Code 128 Settings gt ca ea t eo ea ee 120 5 9 2 3 EAN 13 Settings aoe e ga ee re 121 592A BAN Ss oda s mom arae X E mem Ge A aL eee 122 5 9 2 5 UPC And EAN Settings e c e secs scad atmes 123 5 9 2 6 UPCA Settings 2 cel ee 123 5 9 2 UPC E S et ngS can be bee emor ma eee 124 5 9 2 8 Godabat s gs Re ated me Ro a dO 124 5 9 2 9 Code 03 reos Pe eed eed RR RU e 124 5 9 2 0 Code E su c c Ss eg o od eee a ri IR 125 59 2 11 Interleaved20f5 oe noe ree cacen e oe ea 125 5 9 2 12 MSI Plessey 0 2 ese o o o RR E RR 126 3 9 2 13 Discrete 2 01 5 e iux ee Baad edhe m edle 126 5 0 2 14 TATA 2 O S see doom a b Rex dE Ea 127 5 9 3 Translations 9 eae oO m eR SOS o UR G 127 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Remote Desktop Connection 5 1 Remote Desktop Connection
73. 24 31 And FKEY32 39 06 FKEYO 7 gt FKEYO ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 F2 FKEY3 F3 FKEY4 F4 FKEY5 F5 FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 F7 The sub menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525 function keys 216 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Ports Tether And Console 6 21 Ports Tether And Console r 03 Ports Tether Port Console Settings 1 Console Port Disabled Settings 2 6 21 1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options The Tether Port and Console Port options allow you to enable disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports Both the Tether Port and the Console Port have the same options These are Disabled Serial Console Printer and Scan See To scroll through the options for each port e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected e Disabled indicates that the serial port is not being used e Serial standard serial port e Console used to connect another PC to the 8525 A communication program is required so that communication can proceed between the 8525 and the PC e Printer all TESS print operations are directed to the port All ANSI media copy operations to the primary port are directed to this port e Scan See TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan See throu
74. 3 Null In Fields 2 2 5250 Telnet 2 4 Features 2 6 FKEY0 39 2 6 Intl EBCDIC 2 5 LU Name Enabled 2 5 LU Name Prefix 2 5 Nulls In Fields 2 5 Remap Underline To 2 5 Term Type 2 5 WEC Write Error Code 2 4 Emulation 209 emulation keys IBM 5250 139 Enable Alarm 2 enabling disabling Y N parameters 154 156 Encryption Bluetooth Controls 99 END 31 End ANSI 192 END Key 31 Enh Edit Mode TESS 208 ENTER key 147 completing a data field 739 CR LF character 190 Enter on Arrows 207 Local Echo mode ANSI 1 89 newline mode ANSI 89 Xmit Enter 90 Enter On Arr 207 ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Enter To FO 207 ENT Key 226 entry fields 138 empty fields 200 Function keys 208 hidden match 199 Ign Bcode fld 208 video attributes 183 207 visible match 799 Entry Mode 208 entry mode 208 EOB chars 88 EOL chars 87 Erasure Mode 9 Error Accept 118 Error Tone and Error Time 7 66 ESC Key 31 ESC Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Exit 168 Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP 20 F Fcursor mode 1 40 features of 8525 5 Features 2392 Telnet 2 0 Features 3274 Telnet 2 3 Features 5250 Telnet 2 6 FETM 87 fh forward host number 152 Field mode 140 Field Order 206 fields Arrow mode 88 auto tab fields 138 bar code only fields 138 completing a data field 139 207 Enh Edit mode 208 entry fields 138 200 Field Order 206 Field Scroll 196 Field Size 778 fixed fields 138 hidden match 1 99 Ign Bcode_fld 208
75. 3 The Control Panel ssa aies ea ba Rx rara 63 Control Panel ICONS s e saaa a d en 64 hrec ACHT Sea be Gee kG deer he ae 68 5 5 1 Display Properties n 68 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties e seria e a kr Eg 70 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties lle 79 5 5 4 Power Management Properties 80 10 9 Stylus Proper eS ga era 6 ROS ROG RR 82 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment o lt reres 2e 84 5 5 7 Narrow Band Radio ln 85 Bluetooth Setup gt s xo E a e xm RE E 97 5 6 1 The Devices Fab 22m boo Somme nte 98 5 6 2 Th sS rverlab o uox kom oS koe Rom A 101 5 6 3 The Properties Tab 4 ee hsc ep meds 101 5 6 4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 103 Total Recall ssh pb ebb ee RR em RE A 108 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile 108 3 1 2 Restonng A Profile cs 3x4 rada a 111 IPv6 SUpport ss a ac a eae a a Rs 112 Scanner Properties Setup oo 113 5 9 1 Scanner Options een 113 5 92 Bat Codes Vina ess Gee A ork eG Sys 116 5 0 5 Translations sso eee oko ek RR 126 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 1 TheTektermApplication ens 133 6 2 Additional Keyboard Functions 133 6 2 1 Function Keys And SoftkeyS 133 6 2 2 Macro KEYS o ss ecs a sr ete ee a 134 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 3 4 Contents 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14
76. 33 for details 3 4 3 The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE NET Control Panel The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialogue b OX Note Refer to Keyboard Backlight on page 72 for details about this option Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only 3 5 The Display 8525s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions The backlight switches on when a key is pressed The backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain at full intensity can be specified in the Display Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE NET Control Panel L Note Refer to Display Backlight on page 69 for details about the Display 32 Properties dialogue box 3 5 1 Calibrating The Touchscreen If your 8525 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item use the Stylus Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE NET Control Panel to recalibrate the screen Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 8525 Indicators e In the Control Panel choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window File View 7 x 0 0 2 L 9 w amp F
77. 38 Serial In 203 Serial IO Character 2 serial number Scan See 225 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manua 13 Serial Out 203 Serial Port 203 serial port enabling pins for printers 207 I O fields 203 Serial In 203 Serial Out 203 Serial Port 203 SICRC 204 SI Fkey 204 SI mode 203 SI prefix suffix 204 SO CRC 205 SO prefix suffix 204 Servers Bluetooth Controls 701 service information 4 Services Bluetooth Controls 99 session status sts 752 Set Mode SM control 792 Set PIN Bluetooth Controls 700 Settings Control Panel 56 Network and Dial up connections 56 Run 56 Taskbar and Start Menu 56 setting the session number 138 Shared Mode network authentication 19 SHIFT Key 30 Short Code 5 Shutdown Bootloader 58 Cold Reset 58 Suspend 58 Warm Reset 56 Shutdown Start Menu 57 SI CRC 204 SI Fkey 204 signal quality radio 36 SI mode 203 SI prefix suffix 204 size of fields 118 Size Chars bar code scanning 118 Smart echo mode 7 88 SO CRC 205 softkey function keys 134 softkeys 165 softkeys Function keys 134 softkey labels changing Label F1 F10 197 softkey labels changing Label F1 F5 183 Softkeys parameter 165 SO prefix suffix 204 sound 165 Sound Ctrl 766 SPACE Key 37 specifications battery 250 for 8525 243 Split Screen dividing and displaying 170 moving the cursor between split screens 171 parameters used 170 toggling between full and split screens 171 Type and View IDs 170 us
78. 4 File View 7 2 zz Q O gt b 9 D9 my gt Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet Keyboard Device Options e 2 a 9 2 e 15 Mouse Owner Password Power Regional d connect Settings gt e rj WM b o Remove Storage System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp amp Start C Control Panel uw anl 5 s 9 Figure 5 64 IPv6 Support Icon e Tap on the icon to display the IPv6 Support dialogue box D View a e E Bluetooth Certificates Date Tit IPv6 Keyboard Device Support 3 9 e Regional Remove Mouse Network and Owng Settings Programs Dial up Co Storage e Systel rz um Perdu EE So amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel Ifi IPv6 Suppor 5M il Figure 5 65 IPv6 Support Tab e Tapthe stylus on the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable V this internet protocol Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 113 Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Properties Setup 5 9 Scanner Properties Setup The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialogue boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize File View A x O 07 L 9 9 ww amp E Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support t 2 py amp 9 D I e e sy Mouse Network and Owner Password PC Power Reg
79. 6 F6 FKEY7 F7 The sub menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525 function keys 5250 Telnet Emulation r 05 Emulation Range gt WEC Advisory see text Remap Underline to None see text Intl EBCDIC N Y N Nulls in Fields Y Y N Term Type IBM 5251 11 see text Virtual Dev Enable N Y N Virtual Dev Prefix see text Features see text FKEYO 7 see text FKEY8 15 see text FKEY16 23 see text FKEY24 31 see text FKEY32 39 see text WEC Write Error Code This parameter determines the type of WEC used If set to advisory a TESS advisory message is generated when the host sends a WEC command to the 8525 Otherwise if set to screen text the 8525 locks the keyboard and displays the error message contained in the WEC command on the screen at the line specified by the host In this case the 8525 must be unlocked manually using the function key mapped to RESET 214 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Remap Underline To This parameter allows you to remap the underline cursor to blink bola reverse Or none Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled set to Y the international EBCDIC character set is used swapping the positions of the and characters Nulls In Fields Setting this parameter to Y allows null chara
80. 7 Chapter 5 Configuration Bluetooth Setup Statistics e Tap this button to display communication statistics Refer to Statistics Screen beginning on page 86 for details about this screen Advanced This button launches the Radio Test Application 5 6 Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks PAN The technology is based on a short range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within a 2 meter range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate AN Note The Bluetooth radio card uses an internal antenna e In the Control Panel choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen File View ON 0 7 KJE gt b KR 9 amp oc Bluetooth ertificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support I e 82 AB amp amp 3 Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional Dial up Co Connection Settings Y o oa 3 Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume 8 Stat CE Control Pane uw ol 5 s 9 Figure 5 39 Bluetooth Icon The Bluetooth Manager dialogue box is used to display the other Bluetooth devices with which you can communicate 98
81. 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual October 18 2004 Part No 8000038 A ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System PIS 110 N TEKLOGIX O Copyright 2004 by Psion Teklogix Inc Mississauga Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc is issued in strict confidence and is not to be reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services Furthermore this document is not to be used as a basis for design manufacture or sub contract or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc All trademarks are the property of their respective holders Return To Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix warrants a return to factory warranty for a period of one year from shipment The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details Service When requesting service please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred Type model and serial number should also be provided Before returning any products to the factory call the Customer Services Group for a Return Authorization
82. 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 189 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes PrintScreen Key This parameter determines the hot key for printing the screen contents via the 8525 serial port The default is lt CTRL gt P 16 L Note The 8525 s port must be set to printer see Ports Tether And Con sole on page 217 Xmit Enter The ENTER key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the ENTER key start a transmission from the 8525 When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the ENTER key to start a transmission Insert When this parameter is disabled set to N it behaves in replace mode a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the character at the cursor position The cursor then advances one character position When enabled set to Y the character entered at the keyboard or received from the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following the cursor forward one position The cursor is advanced one position The extent of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the Edit Extent parameter see page 191 Newline When this parameter is disabled set to N an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column In addition the ENTER key transm
83. 9 Wraparound 224 Write Error Code WEC 2 4 X xa transmitted acknowledgements 151 xi transmitted initialize messages 151 X Increment 769 xm transmitted messages 151 Xmit Count 785 Xmit Enter 90 Xmit key 186 Xmit Modes 184 188 Xmit Wait 185 x origin 793 209 Index xr retransmissions 152 Y Y N parameters enabling and disabling 154 156 Y Increment 69 y origin 793 209 1D internal scanner 38 132 col font 782 2392 Telnet See Emulation 2392 Telnet 209 3274 Telnet See Emulation 3274 Telnet 212 5250 emulation keys 139 5250 Telnet See Emulation 5250 Telnet 214 7 bit parameter 186 80 col font 782 802 IQ connection ANSI 177 802 IQ connection TESS 195 802 IQ vl protocol Auto Radio Addr 762 802 IQ v2 227 802 1X authentication enabling 20 802 11b radio configuring 15 8525 approvals 244 off line 145 specifications 243 9010t connection TESS 195 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 17
84. 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI PLESSY Discrete 2 of 5 Dependent on external scanner choice Automatic for all selected codes Non Decoded input Decoded input is external scanner dependent Decoded and Non Decoded 5V only Via tether port 246 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications External Scanner Specifications 8 4 External Scanner Specifications 8 4 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths Electrical Operating voltage Operating current nominal Idling current low power mode Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field Long Range Standard and Intermec compatible 6 9 x 11 2 x 18 3 cm 2 7 x 4 4 x 7 2 in Scanner 280 g 9 9 ozs Cable 82 3 cm 32 in 176 g 6 2 ozs Collapsed 81 cm 32 in Max working 183 cm 72 in 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded 75 mA 5 VDC Decoded 100 mA 5 VDC lt 50 uA 5 VDC Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode VLD Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans sec nominal Paper Labels decoded 7 5mil 6 to 10in 15 to25 cm 10mil 5 to 20in 13to51 cm 15mil 5 to 32in 13 to 81 cm 20mil 5 to 48in 15 to 122 cm 40mil 8 to 85in 20t0216 cm 55mil 15to 108 in 38 to 274 cm Reflective Labels decoded 40 mil 22to 100 in 56 to 254 cm 55mil 30to 104 in 76 to 366 cm 70mil 40to 180in 102 to 457 cm Psion
85. AC powericon 36 ACQ 1t of messages sent but not acknowl edged by cellular master 52 Active Conn Tab 702 ActiveSync ASync profile 99 Addendum 720 122 123 addresses network See also Network addresses 226 Ad Hoc network 78 Advanced wireless connection 23 ah acknowledged host number 752 AIAG AIAG Character 2 0 AIAG Strip 118 Mixed AIAG 206 AIAG Character 2 0 AIAG Strip 1 8 aiming dot duration of 115 All Fld Video 207 Alpha parameters 155 156 ALT Key 31 anchor viewport 22 Anchor Column 222 Anchor Line 222 Anchor View x origin 193 209 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual INDEX y origin 193 209 ANSI of Cols 182 of Pages 181 of Rows 182 Applications menu 175 arrow keys 147 auto answerback string 185 Auto Login Telnet Settings 179 Auto Term 1 76 194 Group 177 194 block mode 148 186 188 Colour Override 784 configuration 46 Conn Type connection type 177 CR character 190 device attribute requests 147 device attribute string 155 disabling the keyboard scanner 190 Edit Modes 191 192 ENTER key 147 189 ENTER Pmpt Telnet Settings 178 ESC Prompt Telnet Settings 179 Func Key Remap Telnet Settings 180 Function key equivalents 147 Group Auto Term 177 194 Host Telnet Settings 178 Kbd Modes 188 190 keyboard lock 786 LF character 790 local editing mode 1 48 185 Login Telnet Settings 179 Login Failed Telnet Settings 180 Login Prompt Te
86. BLUE key and the lt ENTER ON gt key simulta neously for a minimum of six seconds A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit All RAM memory contents are lost The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved When the 8525 is reset the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft Windows CE net splash screen before displaying the startup desktop 6 13 The Parameters Menu e Atthe Display menu type a to display the Parameters menu 01 Parameters Range More Parameters see page 161 Security User S page 160 Display see page 160 The Parameters menu allows you to adjust the screen contrast and select a security level With a Supervisory or Teklogix password you can also access the parameters listed in the More Parameters sub menu Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 159 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Security Settings 6 13 1 Security Settings To access the More Parameters sub menus the Security parameter must be set to either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password The default security level is User 01 Parameters Range More Parameters See page 161 Security see text Display see text e Tap on the Security parameter to display the Security Level dialogue box Refer to Security Levels on page 51 for details about setting the security level f
87. BLUE key and the lt ENTER ON gt key simulta neously for a minimum of six seconds A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit All RAM memory contents are lost While it is most likely that the contents of the flash memory and memory card will be preserved Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee this When the 8525 is reset the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft Windows CE NET splash screen before displaying the startup desktop AN Note You do not need to reset your 8525 after configuring the radio 24 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual GETTING To Know Your 8525 3 3 1 Features Of The 8525 ia croea bx RR E Ede R XO a 27 32 The Internal Backup Battery o 28 3 3 Switching The 8525 Vehicle Mount On And Off 28 34 The Keyboatd codo dee RR agas epi RE S 29 3 4 1 Modifier Keys c us oes we ASS Re wee at dr a 29 3 4 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys 30 3 4 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys o 30 3 4 2 Tbe KEYS eo RR p RR be Pee Le HER RS 30 3 4 3 The Keypad Backlight o 32 3 The Display us ara a AAA xXx S 32 3 5 1 Calibrating The Touchscreen o o 32 3 6 8525 Indicators 4 2 52 24 ko xw a AAA 33 3 6 EEDS s x see ecw dede m ao ub a dede robos es ur d 33 3 6 1 1 PWR CHG Charge LED 34 3 6 1 2 RX TX Radio Traffic LED 34 3 6 1 3 Scam LED e
88. Bluetooth Controls 99 authentication network 79 Auto Answer 85 Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Auto Radio Addr 7 62 227 AutoRep Fn function key sent to host 200 AutoRep T O 200 Auto Start 168 auto tab fields 738 Auto Term ANSI 176 194 Auto wrap 9 B backlight display 69 keyboard 32 backspace CTRL H 769 backup profile creating Total Recall 108 backup profile restoring Total Recall 111 bar code AIAG 206 appending to 7 5 119 121 connecting bar code reader 237 decodes required 716 decoding edge to edge 116 displaying type of bar code 114 parameters 116 127 prefix character 118 121 Security 116 stripping characters 119 121 suffix character 719 121 symbologies Codabar 123 Code 11 124 Code 128 119 Code 39 117 118 Code 93 123 Discrete 20f5 125 EAN 13 720 EAN8 121 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual TATA 2 0f5 126 Interleaved 2 of 5 124 MSI Plessey 125 UPCA 122 UPCE 7 23 Barcode Character 2 0 bar code only fields 138 bar code reader external specs 246 external scanner operation of 231 integrated scanner operation of 37 batteries installing 28 power suspend dialogue box 87 removing 28 specifications 250 Baud 2 9 beacons received rb 151 beacon timeouts bt 52 Beam Lockout 206 beep conditions 1 65 beeper description of beep conditions 37 beeper sounds 1 65 Beep Tone and Beep Time 66 bell CTRL G 189 Binary print 20 BKSP 31 BKSP DEL Key TESS sessions BKS
89. CAUSED BY LICENSOR S NEGLIGENCE Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY LOCAL LAW INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL LICENSOR ITS SUB SIDIARIES AFFILIATES OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFIT LOST DATA OR DOWNTIME COSTS ARIS ING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS LICENSE THE USE INABILITY TO USE OR THE RESULTS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE WHETHER BASED IN WARRANTY CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES In no event shall MDC s total liability to you for all damages exceed the price paid for the license to use the Software regardless of the form of the claim Government End Users If the Software is supplied to the United States Government the Software is classi fied as restricted computer software as defined in clause 52 227 19 of the FAR The United States Government s rights to the Software are as provided in clause 52 227 19 of the FAR Controlling Law and Severability This License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the State of New Hampshire As to any dispute relating to this License or the Software you fur ther agree to jurisdiction and venue in the Federal and State Courts located in the State of New Hampshire If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion thereof to be unenforceable the remai
90. Channel List dialogue box The allowable values range from 0 to 20 e Tap on the arrow next to dropdown menu to scroll through the available channels Highlight the value you want to assign e Once you ve assigned the switching order tap on the OK button to close the dialogue box The channel list is added to the selected channel in the Manual Switch Table dialogue box 5 5 1 3 Protocol Tab Narrow Band Radio El OK x Polling Sync Delay ms n Window Delay ms s Test Polling Poll Time Out 1 60 s fz Values Late TX limit ms b Figure 5 35 Protocol Tab 92 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab Enable Cellular Protocol The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the value assigned to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Network Controller Wireless Gateway or Base Station A warm reset of the 8525 is required before this parameter can take effect If Enable Cellular Protocol is disabled unchecked the options in the Cellular Radio Address frame are displayed in grey text indicating that they cannot be accessed Cellular Radio Address Auto Radio Address If Auto Radio Address is enabled V the 8525 requests an automatically assigned radio address Manual Radio Address is displayed in grey text indicating that it cannot be accessed Manual Radio Address The value entered in the Manual Radio Address parameter is used to ide
91. Channel Switch Speed on page 90 ch Current channel Monitor state of RF Link LOCKED 0 LOCKPENDING 1 LOWC QWAIT 2 SCANNING 3 STARTUP 4 ABANDON 5 rm Number of received messages complete application messages xm Number of transmitted messages complete application messages rf Number of received polls with attached message xf Number of transmitted frames ra Number of received radio link aborts xi Number of transmitted radio link initialization messages rp Number of received polls Xr Number of transmitted retries pt Number of poll timeouts xe Number of transmitted errors rssi Received Signal Strength Indicator Table 5 1 Protocol Statistics Descriptions Low Level Screen e Tapon the Low Level tab to display the Low Level statistics screen Protocol Low Level 4lvl 19200 450 20 2 RxOk 0 RxHd 0 RxBd 0 RxEr 0 RxOv 0 TxOk 0 TxEr O0 CD 0 Col O TxD 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 87 Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab 88 Figure 5 30 Low Level Statistics Screen Table 5 2 defines the elements of the Low Level statistics screen Statistic Description RxOk Message buffers discarded due to lack of available receive buffers RxHd Message headers successfully received RxBd Message bodies successfully received RxEr Message buffers received with detected errors RxOv Number of transmitted messages complete application messages T
92. Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 39 Monitoring The Network Connection 0 39 Connecting An 8325 TOAPC ooo ooo ooo 40 3 10 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files 41 General Maintenance 0 000000 0 eee 41 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen o o 41 311 2 Cleanme The 8525 2 s Som mx a ds ed 42 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET 4 1 4 2 4 3 44 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 45 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 45 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard 46 Working With Files Folders And Programs 47 The Startup Deskt0p e r d ece to 0 2 000000022 eee 47 43 1 The Desktop Icons emo s kx onm x Rm 48 4 3 2 The Taskbar cie ee e RR E 48 The Start Men x oso ogg tomo e een e 4 50 4 4 1 TheDesktop e 50 4 4 2 Security Levels o mn esse e a A 51 44 30 ProPfams osa a a See a 53 4 4 4 Shortcuts lt lt ee ee 55 a bI nun c PD ae aoa ol a leal 56 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Contents 44 0 Rites se aie hea da a hee ara 57 4 4 7 Shutdown o o o 57 4 5 Using A Dialogue Box o e e 58 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 39 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Remote Desktop Connection o o e e 63 Pocket PC Compatibility sos eiiis a a 6
93. DRH Class 2 IEC60825 Class 2 8 4 2 PowerScan M Standard Range Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field Standard paper Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Standard and Intermec compatible 6 9x 11 2x 18 3 cm 2 7 x 4 4 x 7 2 in Scanner 280 g 9 9 ozs Cable 82 3 cm 32 in 176 g 6 2 ozs Collapsed 81 cm 32 in Max working 183 cm 72 in Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode VLD Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans sec nominal Paper Labels decoded 7 5mil 30 to 6in 9to 15 cm 10mil 1 5 to 15in 4t038 cm 15mil 1 0 to 25in 2 5to 64 cm 20mil 1 0 to 35in 2 5to 89 cm 55mil 6 0 to 60in 15to152 cm High Density decoded 3mil 10 to 2in 2 5 to5 1 cm 4mil 10 to 3in 25to8cm 5mil 0 8 to 3 8in 2to 10cm 7 5mil 0 6 to 45in 1 5to 11 cm 10mil 0 2 to 5 5in 0 5 to 14 cm 2596 minimum 65 55 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 249 Chapter 8 Specifications Internal Lithium lon Battery Ambient Light Immunity Electrical Operating voltage Operating current nominal Idling current low power mode Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock at 23 C Vibration Water and Dust Decoding Capabilities Auto discriminates between Safety Regulatory Electrical Emissions Laser Classification Artificial light 1200 ft candles
94. Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communica tion systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PER FORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PUR POSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a per manent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOF
95. N Note You do not need to reboot if you are deactivating a server 5 6 3 The Properties Tab File vie Bluetooth Controls Devices l Servers l Active Conn Bluetooth Device Name Device Device Class wy Local Bluetooth Manufacturer Mouse HCI Version LMP Version e Port Prefix Storage zy Start TekTerm Control Panel JBluetooth Controls 2 5E X SOF Figure 5 42 Bluetooth Properties Tab The Properties tab displays information about your 8525 and provides some port options The Device Name field shows the device name of your 8525 This name can be changed see the Note in this section for details Device Class shows the Class of Device e g desktop hand held which is always set to Handheld Local Bluetooth Address shows the address of your 8525 radio Port Prefix is used to set the port name to either BSP or COM When the name is set to BSP BSP2 to BSP9 are available for activated services including the server When COM is chosen COM7 to COMO are available 102 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Active Conn Tab 5 6 3 1 Active Conn Tab File viel Bluetooth Con gt x F pea R Devices Server E Bluetooth Device Storage h Start TekTerm Control Panel Bluetooth Controls 5 i slo Figure 5 43 Bluetooth Active Conn Tab The Active Conn tab
96. Note Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned through the Password control panel applet Refer to Control Panel Icons on page 64 To assign a password Choose a security level and enter the existing password in the Password field e Choose the Set Password button 52 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Programs A dialogue box labelled Password Properties is displayed e Type the new password in the Password text box e Inthe Confirm Password text box retype the new password Configuring Security Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialogue box Configure Security OK E Show Icons For v Teklogix M Supervisor User Allow Teklogix Security Level Figure 4 9 Configuring Security In addition to allowing the operator to access the Teklogix security level see Accessing Teklogix Level Security on page 51 this dialogue box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon displayed in the taskbar By default a security icon is not displayed for user level security 4 4 3 Programs e TaponPrograms to display a sub menu of options TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n rs 3 Desktop Ead Securit m A Security ber f Programs ActiveSync Pry Shortcuts M8 Command Prompt Figure 4 10 Program Sub Menu Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Compu
97. P key behaviour in 141 TESS sessions DEL key behaviour in 142 BKSP Key 37 BKSP key BKSP key ANSI 189 blinking video attribute 183 207 Block Cursor 169 block mode ANSI 7 48 186 188 BLUEKey 30 Bluetooth radio changing device name 1 02 device service profiles 99 ISM band 97 PINs for devices 700 radio configuration 97 102 Bluetooth setup 97 GPRS setup 103 peripherals 237 Index bold video attribute 183 207 Bootloader Shutdown menu 58 bootnum 802 1Q 151 802 1Q displaying 151 Bright For backlight 70 Brightness 224 Brk for Attn 2 3 BSP Bluetooth Controls 702 bt beacon timeouts 52 Buffer 220 ca cellular address 152 cable diagrams B cables installing in vehicle 237 calibrating touchscreen 32 83 cellular address ca 152 CH Bluetooth Controls 99 changing password Start Menu security 52 changing softkey labels Label F1 F10 183 197 Character parameters TESS 198 characters appending to bar codes 719 121 Char Set choosing TESS 198 cycling through 157 decimal values of 200 EOB chars 88 EOL chars 787 Lower ANSI 193 prefix 118 121 stripping 119 121 suffix 119 121 Upper ANSD 193 character set Tether amp Console Port 2 8 Character Sets Host Char Set 193 character sets choosing inTESS 198 Lower ANSI 193 Upper ANSD 193 Char Set TESS 198 Check Digit 724 check digit 120 123 124 125 Check Digit One 25 Clear Entry Fields 2 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Com
98. Power Properties dialogue box File view Power Properties gt x Suspend card Slots gt I Bluetooth board Device On External Power y j Switch state to Suspend Storage E Start J rekrem Q Control Panel Power Properties Figure 6 10 Power Properties Dialogue Box N Important Refer to Power Management Properties on page 80 for details about this dialogue box 6 17 4 User Permissions 04 User Permissions Range Screen Switch Ye Font Change Y Exit N At User security level the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters AN Important Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the values of the User options Screen Switch When set to Y the operator can use the Split screen parameter to toggle between screens when multiple applications are running on the 8525 Refer to Split Screen on page 170 for details about using this function Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 167 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Auto Start Font Change When Font Change 1s set to Y operators at the User level can change the font size of their 8525s Exit If this parameter is set to Y an operator with user level security can exit Tekterm by pressing ALT F4 If Exit is set to N the operator cannot exit Tekterm 6 17 5 Auto Start Auto Start dete
99. Properties dialogue box open the Repeat tab a Bluetooth Device D Mouse e Storage Keyboard Properties th Long Repeat delay Tap here and hold down a key to test FE Start 1 TekTerm Control Panel JJ Keyboard Properties SX La AUTO ar Figure 5 7 Key Repeat Properties Enable Character Repeat Tapping in the checkbox next to this option enables V the key behaviour you specify in this dialogue box Repeat Delay The repeat delay chosen for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second cps Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate En Use the field at the bottom of this dialogue box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you ve chosen Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 71 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Backlight 5 5 2 2 Keyboard Backlight e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Backlight tab Keyboard Properties Options On For fis seconds y n When using external power
100. RY Declaration Of Conformity Product 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Application of Council EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive s Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Conformity Declared EN 55022 1998 Am 1 Class B to Standards EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 EN 55024 1998 EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 3V m 80 1000 MHz EN 61000 4 4 1kV Power lines EN 61000 4 5 1kV Differential mode EN 61000 4 6 3VRMS 150kHz 80MHz EN 61000 4 11 AC Mains Ports Manufacturer PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture 2003 Manufacturer s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S A in the European La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 Community 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Type of Equipment Information Technology Equipment Equipment Class Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc Ontario Legal Representative Domique Binckly Vice President International Sales Psion Teklogix S A France Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual IX Approvals And Safety Summary This equipment complies with Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2
101. S AND OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONIN FRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS LICENSOR DOES NOT WAR RANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFT WARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU AND NOT LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WAR Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement RANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THE TERMS OF THIS DISCLAIMER DO NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE THE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER ACQUIRING LICENSOR PROD UCTS OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS NEITHER DO THEY LIMIT OR EXCLUDE ANY LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
102. SB connections Device Driver Backup Selection Dialogue Box The USB Setup application will attempt to back up the driver sys files before attempting the installation It specifies which files it will try to back up and the location to which it will back them up E Psion Teklogix USB Setup cme 0000 8s This program can make backup copies ofthe driver files itis replacing Choose the files to backup and the path where the backup files should be stored Iv CAWINNTsystem32Adriverstwceusbsh sys M CAWINNT system32 drivers usbstor sys Path CAWINNT system32 drivers phBackup Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel Both drivers are selected for backup by default The backup directory is system directory gt drivers ptxBackup Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 3 Appendix C USB Setup Application Installation Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC C 1 3 Installation Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC 1 Install Dialogue Box The sys files you selected are copied to the backup directory If an unknown error occurs during the backup you are asked whether you d prefer to cancel the install or continue with the process The wceusbsh inf and usbstor inf files are updated If you indicated that the wceusbsh driver should be installed the Install dialogue box appears again The USB Setup application will attempt to install the drivers immediately This will succeed only if a valid USB
103. SSI dBm 45 Make New Serial Cablg Channel kHz 2417000 Connection on COM2 Network Name qwertyui Access Point 00 02 2d 60 d2 33 MAC Address 00 10 c6 25 65 65 Data Rate bps 11000000 Frame Size 1500 Packet Size 1514 Packets IN 7559 Packets OUT 6640 IN errors 46 OUT errors 0 E Start TekTerm amp Network Connections BTXWLAGS46B1 i544 Figure 2 3 Wireless Statistics This tab lists your radio statistics Choosing the lero button resets the statis tics of the last four items Packets IN Packets OUT IN errors and OUT errors e Tap the stylus on the Wireless Information tab 4 Wireless Information Tab File Edit View Allie i M cm 1 5 2 x E 1 de LIP Information Wireless Statistics Wireless Information Select a network and press connect or right click for more Make New Serial Cable options To add a new network double click Add New Connection on COM2 d New Connect i abcdefghikimnoparstuvwxyzabcef Advanced Y qwertyui preferred i SMC i View Log Status Connected to qwertyui Signal Strength Excellent M Notify me when new wireless networks are available amp jStart TekTerm amp Network Connections pPrTXwLAGS4681 i mi Figure 2 4 Wireless Information Tab This tab display existing networks to which you can connect and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network L Note Connect button
104. Sunlight 8000 ft candles 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded 75 mA 5 VDC Decoded 100 mA 5 VDC lt 50 uA O 5 VDC Operating 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 5 to 95 NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete Meets MIL STD 810E IEC529 rating IP54DW UPC A E EANS 13 JAN8 13 P2 P5 Code 128 EAN add ons Code 128 MSI Plessey Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii Standard 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Complies to Gost R TUV UL cUL Complies to FCC A EN55022 B BCIQCNS13438 AS NZS3548 VCCI B CDRH Class 2 IEC60825 Class 2 8 5 Internal Lithium lon Battery Not user accessible Technology 12 6V Lithium Ion Li Ion backup battery 250 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual APPENDIX SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom ers worldwide These services include technical support and product repairs A I Technical Support Technical Support for Mobile Computing Products is provided via e mail through the Psion Teklogix customer and partner extranets To reach the website go to www psionteklogix com and click on the appropriate Teknet link on the home page Then click on the Log in button or the Register button depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet Once you have logged in search for the Support Request Form
105. TWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U S export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For addi tional information see http www microsoft com exporting Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc End User License Agreement End User License Agreement ATTENTION PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLATION USE OF THE SOFT WARE IS SUBJECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND IF THE SOFTWARE IS SUPPLIED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND Software License Terms The following terms govern your use of the enclosed Software unless you have a separate written agreement with Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc herein also known as MDC License Grant MDC grants you a non exclusive and non transferable license to Use one copy of the Software Use means storing loading
106. The lacal country region code is f gional Dial using e Ione O Pulse ttings i 7 Disable call waiting by dang z Remove reless Figure 5 52 Setting Up Dialing Properties Once you ve edited this dialogue box to reflect your network carrier requirements press ENTER to save your changes 11 At this point you ll need to return to the Control Panel and select the Network and Dial up Connections icon Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 107 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 12 In the network connection window the new network configuration in this case GPRS Network is displayed Choose the new icon Bs Ea vew a a Xe a aie E S 2 Make New Serial Cable USB Cable PTXWLAG Connection on COM2 amp jStart Tekrerm amp Network Connections de E Figure 5 53 GPRS Network Connection This onscreen message indicates the status of your connection connected disconnected error messages and so on EX e EJES E A X Connected to GPRS uus Make New Ee ju Connection network A TES Hide this message start rekrem JE Network Connections i 547 Figure 5 54 Successful Connection Select the Hide button to move this message to the background You can now access the internet Bs ER wes rones O15 Address http www msn com Great Deal MSN 9 Internet Access Friday May 14 AG Today on MSN p Autos E Ar
107. This device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Psion Teklogix the party responsible for compliance may void the user s authority to operate the equipment 1 FCC Information to Users For Class B Unintentional Radiators This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential instal lation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guaran tee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 2 Warning to Users g Warning Changes o
108. This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer In this menu the Y or N is used to visually guide you to the selected character set For example in the sample menu above the Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group 198 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Characters To choose a character set Position the cursor on the appropriate item for example ISO and press lt F1 gt to display the character set options e To activate a character set press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to set it to Y AN Important If you choose a Chinese character set from the Misc menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the 8525 screen a shaded box character is used as a substitute Please review Default font on page 208 If you are using a Korean character set a right arrow character is used as a substitute V Match Chr This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The vehicle mount beeps if the entered data does not match Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character t
109. Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters 6 21 3 Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters When Scan See is specified as the peripheral for either the Tether or the Console port the parameters listed under the Scan See sub menu are used to tailor the operation of this type of scanner The other parameters listed in this menu Character Set Baud and so on are identical to those described beginning on page 217 05 Scan See Character Set Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity none Stop Bits 1 Retries 3 Input Tmo 2 Scan See 6 21 3 1 Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 05 Scan See Anchor Line Anchor Col llow Cursor Fol Line Offset Col umn Lumn Offset Wraparound Panning Line Scrol lling Brightness Arrows Version NOWOwZKZO00OKhpp Range Bright Horz Vert Osea Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 221 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport The Scan See display is mapped to a specific area on the 8525 screen called the viewport and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen The Scan See viewport is defined as follows Anchor Line Anchor Column A location on the Scan See display the anchor is chosen as a reference point Line Offset Column Offset A
110. abels PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 CE O Figure 1 4 M2020 Label EU PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains C N553 Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 FCC ID GM3RA2020M IC 2739D RA2020 TOSHIBA Model SD BT2 FCC ID CJ MSDBO1 IC 248H MSDBO1 OFFICE USE Figure 1 5 RA2020 amp SD BT2 Label FCC IC Australia New Zealand PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 amp TOSHIBA Model SD BT2 C 0681 1 Figure 1 6 RA2020 SD BT2 Label EU 10 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels PSION Teklogix Inc Th s product contains TOSHIBA Model SD BT2 FCCID J6MSDBO1 1C 248H MSDBO1 C 0681 0 FE CN555 OFFICE USE Figure 1 7 SD BT2 Label EU FCC IC Australia New Zealand Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 11 Basic CHECKOUT 2 1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation llle 15 2 2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 15 2 2 1 Switching The 8525 On 2 2 2 022 000 e 15 2 2 2 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 15 2 2 3 Assigning An IP Address lt s s osc o e 21 2 2 4 Name Servers Tab s cdc oere wa o oo e ag 22 2 2 5 Advanced P atutes ae io a we the 23 2 2 5 1 Rearranging Preferred Networks 23 2 2 5 2 Deleting A Preferred Network
111. able kbd DEC Cursor Keys cursor mode ursor fiel EL CLEAR 255 Y N Y N Y N Y N see text c S BS CLEAR D 1 mart Local Host Arrow mode This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or between fields When set to field pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to move to the next field in the direction of the arrow When set to cursor pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys move the cursor within the current field Echo Mode This parameter selects echo mode for the 8525 The available modes are Local Host and Smart Local In this mode any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host Certain keys cause additional action at the 8525 as shown in Table 6 4 on page 189 Host In this mode the vehicle mount computer sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host Smart This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer The 8525 displays all printable characters on the 188 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes screen before sending them to the host The vehicle mount com pares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and fix
112. actory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol This parameter specifies the amount of time in milliseconds the 8525 should add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive transmit switching characteristics of the radio The value assigned must be compatible with other units and base stations in the system The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio operating at 9600 baud Poll Timeout This parameter in units of 16 6 ms sets the time out value used for automatic channel switching Poll Timeout is the time during which the 8525 should detect at least one poll from a base station As each Poll Timeout passes without a successful poll from the base station the 8525 channel quality decreases If the channel quality falls to below 46 the terminal begins searching for a new channel A value from 1 to 200 can be assigned to this parameter Late TX Limit The value entered for this parameter measured in milliseconds sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which an 8525 can make a transmission After this threshold the transmission will not be attempted and the 8525 will try again at the next opportunity For example suppose this parameter is set to 5 From the beginning of the response window the 8525 can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission Beyond this threshold th
113. al Input EMI controls Xmit key When this parameter is disabled set to N the key that causes the 8525 vehicle mount to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data When enabled set to Y the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data has been sent to the host This parameter applies only to block mode 186 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes FETM When the Format Effector Transfer Mode FETM parameter is disabled set to N Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the Format Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the data transferred to the console or serial ports GATM When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode GATM parameter is disabled set to N only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y both guarded and unguarded data can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports MATM When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode MATM parameter is disabled set to N only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y all selected areas can be transmitted to
114. al 219 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings Supports XON XOFF or no handshaking Print Used to output data only All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored Supports XON XOFF or no handshaking Output Used to output data only All input characters are ignored Supports no handshaking L Note To enable the input and or output serial in and or serial out must be enabled in the TESS menu Buffer The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output The buffer controls the amount of data the application can send to or receive from a serial device Retries This parameter determines the number of times the 8525 attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded the transmission fails Input Tmo This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 8525 waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks Output Tmo The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of milliseconds that the application will wait for a write sent to the port to succeed before it is aborted The write may be one or several bytes in length Test When this parameter is enabled set to Y data is output through the serial port to make certain that it is operating appropriately 220 Psion Teklogix 8525
115. al information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or data loss 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 1 3 About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer The 8525 is a ruggedized vehicle mount computer running the Microsoft Windows CE NET operating system It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions AII possible bar code input methodologies are supported by a variety of scanners available 1 3 1 Features e Processor And Memory 400MHz ARM RISC 400 MIPS 32KB instruction 32K B data cache on board RAM 128mByte SDRAM on board ROM 64 MByte FLASH e Operating System Windows CE NET 4 2 e Wireless Communication IEEE 802 11b 11 Mbps 2 4 GHz Compact Flash radio external and internal antenna IEEE 802 11b 11 Mbps 2 4 GHz external antenna PC Card Slot radio standard antenna integrated onto radio card Future radio additions IEEE 802 11g 22Mbps 2 4GHz Compact Flash radio IEEE 802 11a 54Mbps 5 GHz Compact Flash radio IEEE 802 11a 54Mbps 5 GHz PC Card radio NextGen Narrowband 400 500 MHz radio GSM GPRS PC Card radio for future release Bluetooth SD I O radio 2 4 GHz 5m range e Application Software Internet Explorer 6 for CE Open Tekterm ANSI TESS terminal emulations IBM 3270 IBM 5250 HP 2392 e User Interface Psion Te
116. allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 20 The default value is 1 L Note The Channel Number dropdown menu displays only the channels that have been enabled in the Channel Enable List Power Up Channel When this parameter is enabled V the 8525 begins communicating on the channel specified in the Channel Number parameter when the unit is powered up This setting may prevent the migration of 8525s to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites If this parameter is disabled unchecked the unit will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was powered off Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 89 Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab Channel Enable List e Tap on the Channel Enable List button to display a dialogue box listing available channels Channel Enable List ox xj Available Channels M Channel 2 Channel 3 M Channel 4 Figure 5 32 Channel Enable Dialogue Box This dialogue box is completed by default with all channels that have frequencies configured A checkmark V indicates that a channel is enabled An unchecked check box indicates that the channel is disabled The maximum number of channels supported by the RA1001 Narrow Band radio is 20 Enabling a channel V allows the channel to be set to an operating channel Channel Number and makes it available for channel searching For example if Channel is the operating channel and all other
117. ameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes 2 characters When disabled these short bar codes are rejected Enabling Short Code may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the 8525 must decode more potential bar codes it is therefore not recommended for general purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters 116 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Bar Codes Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve the reliability of the decoded bar code Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge bar codes Code 93 Code 128 UPC EAN Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting 5 9 2 Bar Codes File View Scanner Properties OK Ea x Options Barcodes Translations I gt 2 ONU Certificates Date T E IPv6 Keyboard Code 128 support Qu EAN 13 y hb EAN 8 Mouse Network and Ownd UPC EAN Regional Remove Dial up Co UPC A Settings Programs ev 4 UPC E 5 3 amp Codabar disabled El Storage Stylus Syste OS ECO SU Figure 5 68 Bar Code Selection All t
118. an LED flashes red Table 3 2 Scan LED 3 6 1 4 API User Application LED This indicator 1s available for user loaded custom Windows CE NET applications Refer to the 8525 SDK Manual for details about this LED Neither Windows CE NET nor Tekterm use this LED Successful scan 3 6 1 Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators Remote Computer Desktop J la Recycle Bin TekTerm o A Internet Explorer Start Figure 3 6 Taskbar Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 35 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Onscreen Indicators This display changes dynamically and only those icons that are applicable are displayed For example if a radio is not installed in your 8525 the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar Start Windows Start Button You can display the Start Menu by tapping on the Windows Start button in the taskbar blue BLUE A a key KEY Modifier Key Indicators lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt ALT BLUE and lt ORANGE gt are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it the key is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters for example pressing the BLUE key once displays blue key in the taskbar If a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on and the onscreen indicator i
119. an be decreased to allow the received signal and increase range This parameter is stored in the radio s non volatile memory Test Squelch e Tap on the Test Squelch button to prompt the radio to use the Data Squelch value without committing it to the radio s non volatile memory in other words to test the value assigned to the Data Squelch parameter To commit the new Data Squelch value to the radio s non volatile memory e Tap on the OK button the dialogue box is closed and the new value is saved To discard the new value and keep the old Data Squelch value e Tap on the X button at the top of the dialogue box The old value is sent to the protocol driver Frequency Table e Tap on the Frequency button to display the Frequency Table dialogue box ox x ch1 5 ch6 10 ch 11 15 ch 16 20 Channel Receive MHz Transmit MHz ils 446 837500 446 837500 E 443 000000 443 000000 3 451 000000 451 000000 4 5 437 750000 437 750000 438 250000 438 250000 Copy Receive to Transmit Figure 5 38 e Tap on the Copy Receive to Transmit button to copy the contents of the Receive fields into the corresponding Transmit fields When you tap on this button a warning box is displayed asking Copy all the Rx frequencies to the Tx frequencies e Tap on the Yes button to go ahead or No to stop the copy process Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 9
120. anship under normal use for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of original retail purchase Your exclusive remedy under this para graph shall be at MDC s option a refund of the purchase price of the product con taining the Software or replacement of the Software which is returned to MDC or a Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual V VI License Agreement MDC authorized representative with a copy of the receipt THIS LIMITED WAR RANTY AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE MEDIA INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY 90 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE SOME JURIS DICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LICENSOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY BY JURISDICTION Disclaimer of Warranty on Software You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk The Software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind and MDC and MDC s licensor s for the purposes of warranty and liability MDC and MDC s licensor s shall be collectively referred to as MDC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIE
121. anual 49 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET The Start Menu 4 4 The Start Menu Note Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the 8525 s current security settings The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application To display the menu e Tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n S G Programs gt Activesync F Shortcuts AB Command Prompt Remote Connect 2 TekTerm Windows Explorer Figure 4 5 Start Menu 4 4 1 The Desktop Choosing the Desktop option from the Start Menu displays the 8525 desktop 50 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Security Levels 4 4 2 Security Levels Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialogue box in which you can define the access level for the 8525 Supervisor or User Security Level O Supervisor Password E Set Password Configure Figure 4 6 Security Level Assigning The Supervisor Security Level The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar The security levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and the taskbar By default the security level is set to User restricting access to only the mo
122. aracter set e Position the cursor on the appropriate item for example ISO and press lt F1 gt to display the character set options e To activate a character set press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to set it to Y N Important If you choose a Chinese character set from the Misc menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen a shaded box character is used as a substitute If you are using a Korean character set a right arrow character is used as a substitute Baud This parameter determines the bit rate of the port Allowable values include 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps 115 2kbps 128 0kbps or 256 0kbps Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port Possible values are 6 7 8 Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port The options are none odd even mark and space Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Flow Control This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your vehicle mount computer The 8525 can perform Software or Hardware handshaking or you can choose Both to enable both of these options The function of each mode is as follows Enable Used to input and output data Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manu
123. arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to the next field When you have finished creating the Unicode characters you want to use e Press F4 to save your changes e Reset the 8525 press and hold down the ENTER and BLUE key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds 6 19 22 Displaying The Unicode V Pop up Window The Unicode values you create are stored in a pop up window that you can access from any application To display the pop up window within any application e Press CTRL ALT A fL Note Unicode M characters that cannot be displayed on your screen with the Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 173 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window font you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop up window See the sample menu on page 174 However the actual Uni code value you created will be sent to the host Select item with arrow keys Press ENTER when done Press ESC to cancel 0000 Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor on the Unicode value you want to use and press ENTER To close the pop up menu when you re done e Press the lt ESC gt key Font Override 04 Font Override Font Code 0 is font 18x32 Font Code 1 sae Ls font 18x32 Font Code 2 see Es font 10x26 Font Code 3 ix us ont 18x32 Font Code 4 is font 8x20
124. as scanners and printers connect to the vehicle mount computer with a quick release circular connector When a peripheral is connected to the vehicle mount the 8525 detects the peripheral and loads the necessary drivers for it An icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of the peripheral and indicates that it is ready for operation To attach the peripheral to the round tether port on the side of the 8525 e Insert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until it clicks into place The red dot on the port and on the connector should be aligned Tether Port Figure 3 7 The Tether Port To remove the peripheral e Grasp the shell of the plug and pull it back gently to unlock and release the connector A Important Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector by the wire The connector is locked into place and can only be unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell 3 9 Monitoring The Network Connection If your vehicle mount is equipped with a wireless LAN radio it will typically associate with the nearest access point The radio signal quality meter in the taskbar indicates the relative strength of the communication link 40 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Connecting An 8525 To A PC To access the radio signal icon from the keyboard e Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to dis
125. at private expense and are provided as Commercial Computer Software or restricted computer soft ware They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 Oct 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 Jun 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the MDC standard software agreement for the product Export Law Assurances You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained In particular but without limitation the Software may not be exported or reexported 1 into or to a national or resident of any U S embargoed country or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Department of Commerce s Table of Denial Orders By using the Software you represent and warrant that you are not located in under control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list Limited Warranty on Media if applicable MDC warrants the media on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workm
126. ates a backup that is manually restored by the operator AutoRestore Profile for this device only creates a profile that automati cally restores itself following a cold boot lone Profile for other devices creates a profile that automatically restores after resuming from a cold boot but it will not contain the touch screen calibration coordinates or the Wireless radio settings Profile Location allows the operator to specify where the profile is to be saved The location for the profile will typically be Flash or a Storage card e Tap on the Next button to display the next dialogue box Add Files 110 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile Add Files All Files Databases Registry By File Figure 5 60 Adding Files By default All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files database entries and the Registry will be saved You can however limit the backup to database and or the registry only The backup By Individual File option allows you to select the exact file or files you want to backup The By File Type option allows you to select by predefined file types e Tap on the Next gt button to view your selections Figure 5 61 By File Type Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 111 Chapter 5 Configuration Restoring A Profile View Selections Depending on what you have se
127. average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial Round Trip Time is required The com puter uses the time assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmis sions and acknowledgements Protocol Type Protocol Type is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the 8525 The default value 2457 assigned to this parameter identifies the Teklogix 802 1Q protocol Ethernet packet frame types The Protocol Type ID should only be altered if the default value is already being used to specify another application Ethernet frame type N Important If you change the value assigned to Protocol Type ID ensure that all 8525s and 9150s in your system use the same number 6 17 System Parameters 03 System Keyboard Audio Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel User Permissions Auto Start Y Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 163 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Keyboard gt gt 6 17 1 Keyboard r 04 Keyboard Macro Ctrl Panel Indicators Y Softkeys Y Ctrl Panel 6 17 1 1 Macro Control Panel e Highlight Macro Ctrl Panel and press F1 to display the Macros tab in the Keyboard Properties dialogue box a
128. balSign Root CA tings i Import View Remove Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp L Dronrarnc fa cy iy Sans amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel IF Certificates Ji 5053 Figure 5 26 Certificates Dialogue Box For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client side devices 8525s refer to the following website www microsoft com windows2000 techinfo planning walkthroughs default asp Security Services L Note When importing certificates the 8525 only recognizes cer files 5 5 7 Narrow Band Radio Note Keep in mind that the Narrow Band icon is only visible in the Control Panel when a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit e n the Control Panel choose the Narrow Band radio icon File View z x Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support e s 05 Y 9 Mouse Narrow Band fletwork and Owner Password PC Power Regional i Dial up Co Connection Settings o w Mp Jo L Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp L Drogracoc ah enc _ _ AAA amp Start ry Control Panel Ene will S Figure 5 27 Narrow Band Icon Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 85 Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab 5 5 7 1 Info Tab In the Narrow Band Mdio dialogue box the Info tab displays information about the radio it cannot be edited Narro
129. cation between devices It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone as a data modem exchanging information with other Blue tooth devices and providing network access lo Total Recall Total Recall This is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is extended to incorporate powerful advanced features R IPv6 Support IPv6 Support Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification version 6 that has been published to use 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 67 Chapter 5 Configuration Basic Setup I Narrow Band Radio 5 5 Basic Setup 5 5 Display Properties e In the Control Panel choose the Display icon This icon is displayed only if a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit It eeu provides access the Narrow Band setup screens File View 0 0 b Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing P Internet Device Options A e 9 1 8 1 amp Mouse Narrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Radio iDial up Co Connection Y o y WW i 3o Teklogx Total Recall Volume amp Remove Storage System Start N Control Pan Figure 5 2 Choosing The Display Icon 5 5 1 1 Display Background R IPv6 Support d Power Ee wil SS 3 Keyboard 54 Re
130. channels are enabled V the 8525 can roam through all 20 channels Channel Switch Speed This parameter changes the threshold the 8525 uses to determine when communication quality with a base station is unacceptable When this threshold is exceeded the unit starts channel searching for a new base station Setting this parameter to Slow means a higher threshold the 8525 is more tolerant of poor communication quality When the channel quality of the vehicle mount radio drops below 46 the unit monitors the channel quality for 15 timeout periods before searching for a new channel If Channel Switch Speed is set to Fast the current channel is only monitored for up to 2 time out periods before channel switching begins A N Important Fast switch speed is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping If the coverage areas barely overlap have dead spots or if the 8525 frequently operates on the fringe of cov erage this parameter should be set to Slow 90 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab Channel Selection Enabling V Manual Select allows you to set the channel search order the 8525 will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required If this parameter is enabled the 8525 uses the channel switching lists specified in the Manual Switch Table If this parameter is disabled unchecked the vehicle mount uses a
131. character set options e Press F4 to save your selection to memory N Important When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a rectangular box is used as a substitute 6 20 1 8 Anchor View r 05 Anchor Range x origin 1 24 y origin 1 80 When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The x origin and y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed x origin and y origin The x origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored The y origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 193 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Settings 6 20 2 TESS Settings m 04 TESS Auto Term 4 Terminal Host Conn Screen Characters Tests Features Scanner Fields Anchor View Emulation N 1 N Range see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional TESS information is documented in TESS Emulation on page 137 Auto Term
132. cters e g hyphens or periods to fill in empty entry fields Term Type The value assigned for this parameter IBM 5555 001 or IBM 5251 11 indicates the type of terminal to report during the Telnet negotiations It determines how the AS 400 host treats the terminal IBM 5251 11 is a standard 5250 terminal IBM 5555 001 is a Korean language terminal Virtual Dev Enabled If enabled set to Y this parameter allows the 8525 to negotiate a specific device name for itself Virtual Dev Prefix The prefix assigned in this field is used when the Virtual Dev Enabled parameter see above is set to Y The current terminal number is appended to the prefix to generate a unique device name You can assign up to 9 upper case alphanumeric characters in this field Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 215 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Features 5250 Telnet 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392 Telnet Refer to Features 2392 Telnet beginning on page 210 FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEYI6 23 FKEY
133. d Spectrum for future release Compact Flash form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range RX Sensitivity Data Rates 32mW max 2 400 2 4835 1 to 13 30 115m 86dBm 6Mbps 54 48 36 34 18 12 9 6Mbps auto fallback 802 1 1a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum for future release Compact Flash or PC Card form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range Rx Sensitivity Data Rates 40mW max 5 15 5 35GHz 5 47 5 85GHz 1 to 20 50 115m 87dBm 6Mbps 54 48 36 24 18 1 2 9 and 6 Mbps auto fallback Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 245 Chapter 8 Specifications Bar Code Scanning RAI001 Narrow Band Radio Psion Teklogix Proprietary Narrowband Modulation 2 4 level FSK Type III PC Card Form Factor 1W or 0 5W 403 422 MHz 419 435 MHz 435 451 MHz 450 470 MHz 464 480 MHz 480 496 MHz 496 512 MHz 110 dBm E 19 2 kbps 4 level FSK 4800 bps 9600 bps 19 2 kbps Transmit Power Frequency Range Rx Sensitivity Data Rates Bluetooth Radio SDI O form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range RX Sensitivity Data Rate 8 3 Bar Code Scanning Scanner Types Non Decoded Codes Supported Decoded Codes Supported Code Discrimination 8 3 1 External Scanners Supported Types Interface OdBm max 9dBm min 2 400 2 4835 72dBm typ 75dBm max 784 Kbps Decoded and non decoded Code 39 code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 EAN 128 UPC A UPC E Codabar Code
134. d control the brightness and the line and column offsets as described on page 224 e Bar code data is stripped off any identifying headers symbology etc and passed verbatim The Scan See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC 8 ASCII character set Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated to 6 22 Network r 03 Network Ctrl Panel 802 I Qv2 6 22 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings This option displays a Windows CE NET screen where you can set up your radio launch an penas network connection or create a new connection ov Fy E Serial Cable USB Cable PTXWLAG Start_ TekTerm Network Connections Figure 6 12 Network Settings 226 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Pic Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 10 v2 N Important Follow the steps outlined in Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 on page 15 for details about configuring your radio 6 22 2 802 10 v2 N Important For setup information about 802 10 v2 refer to the 9400 and 9450 Network Controllers User Manual and or the 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 04 802 10 v2 Range Port 8888 see text More Parameters see text Port Port specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2 The default value is 8888 Keep in mind that the value assigned here must matc
135. d how to use it This chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE NET window selecting and opening icons files folders and working with a Windows dialogue box Chapter 5 Configuration provides a description of the Windows CE NET Control Panel and how to use it to configure the 8525 along with the scanners attached to the unit and so on Chapter 6 Tekterm Application describes TESS and ANSI operations This chapter also provides descriptions of the Tekterm parameters Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 8525 Chapter 8 Specifications details radio vehicle mount computer and battery specifications Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga Ontario Canada office and details the support services available This appendix also lists the world wide office addresses and phone numbers Appendix B Port Pinouts includes 8525 pinouts Appendix C USB Setup Application describes the USB application Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Text Conventions L Note Notes highlight additional helpful information AY Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment g Warning These statements provide critic
136. ding on the type of application you are running ANSI or TESS and the type of radio installed in your 8525 For ANSI applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections 802 10v2 9010t TCP Direct Telnet and Narrow Band Keep in mind that choosing Telnet allows the 8525 to communicate directly with the host Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 177 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Settings AN Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 1Qv2 is selected as the Conn Type In addition this sub menu varies depending on which option you ve selected Telnet or 9010t Telnet Settings Range Host see text Port 23 0 32767 Terminal Type VT220 see text ENTER Pmpt Press ENTER to connect see text ESC Prompt Press ESC to cancel see text Auto Login N Y N Func Key Remap N Y N Arrow Key Remap N Y N 9010t Settings Range gt Host see text Port 9999 0 9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format HH HHH HHH HHH or a host name if DNS is used Port Port specifies the 9010t TCP Direct or Telnet port number The default 9010t port number assigned is 9999 the maximum allowable value The default Telnet port number assigned is 23 with a maximum allowable value of 32767 Terminal Type This parameter allows the 8525 to perform its ow
137. ds are not displayed in reverse video The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section 156 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application String Entry Parameters In string entry parameters the UP arrow DOWN arrow ENTER and lt BKSP gt keys have the following functions e The UP and DOWN arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow ENTER completes the entry field e lt BKSP gt deletes the character to the left of the cursor e DEL key combination BLUE BKSP clears the entire field Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys AN Important Make sure the lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt keys are turned off By pressing either the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard e Press the RIGHT arrow to display the next character in this sequence and the lt LEFT gt arrow to display the previous one Adding Additional ASCII Characters When you ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character Normally pressing the RIGHT arrow key moves the cursor to the right but in a string entry field pressing the RIGHT arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters ins
138. e transmission is not attempted The vehicle mount waits for the next opportunity The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 and 10 the default value is 2 94 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Tab Test Polling Values Tapping on this button allows you to test the suitability of the polling values you ve assigned before they are saved to memory 5 5 14 Power Tab od xl Info Channel Protocol Power Radio IV Enable Power Saving Idle Poll Limit Power Off Time Figure 5 36 Power Tab Enable Power Saving When this parameter is checked o power saving is enabled Idle Poll Limit L Note The Idle Poll Limit parameter is only used when Enable Power Sav ing is enabled N This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities base station polls with available response windows must be consecutively skipped before the 8525 places the radio into power down mode for power saving The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 to 200 The default value is 10 Lower values cause the vehicle mount to enter power saving mode quickly extending battery life but reducing 8525 responsiveness Higher values increase responsiveness but decrease battery life Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 95 Chapter 5 Configuration Radio Tab 96 Power Off Time This parameter determines the amount of time in seco
139. e 69 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties ea osseete senmenn adea ead 70 3 5 2 1 Key Repeat 6e dae ea amy RS RR S 71 5 5 2 2 Keyboard Backlight o 72 5 5 2 3 Keyboard One Shot Modes 0 72 5 5 2 4 Keyboard Macro Keys o 73 5 5 2 5 Unicode Mapping lt xe s s e e o e e 75 5 5 2 6 Scancode Remapping o o TI 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties o 79 5 5 3 1 Volume AdjustmentS ss s see o e 80 5 5 4 Power Management Properties 04 80 5 5 4 1 PowerSuspend lens 81 23 542 Catd SIOLS coi a a ee Rae ee ex Ga ad 82 5 5 5 Stylus Properties 2o ee 82 5 5 5 1 Setting Double Tap Sensitivity 83 5 5 5 2 Touchscreen Calibration 83 5 5 5 3 Options Disabling The Touchscreen 84 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment 202 0000 00004 84 5 5 7 Narrow Band Radio s sse s oaea ees 85 Il Into Tab eo ue b Rd xo a Ee 3 86 3 5 7 2 Channel Tab ssai a0 ss eoo oa 9 89 53 5 43 Protocol Tabs ss eae sana 92 3 5 L4 Power Tab ose ra Sono bre des ovs 95 5 50 55 Radio TaD a eux oh omm em e Om ox A 96 5 6 Bluetooth Setups 44 ee be dae oo RR xd Rx OR RR PR EE S S 98 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 61 Chapter 5 Configuration 62 5 61 The Devices Tabia co carpen o o eee ee 99 5 6 2 Th Server lab ao aoe a ke aoe ute LOS ew Be 10
140. e Delete Macro button 74 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Unicode Mapping 5 5 2 5 Unicode Mapping e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Unicode Mapping tab a Bluetooth Device Keyboard Properties Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros s c Unicode Add Change Remove Storage Start TekTem Control Panel zzKeyboardPropertes gt EN i UD Figure 5 12 Unicode Mapping The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt states to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For example the sample screen above shows a U 0061 indicating that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values All user defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state If a Unicode mapping is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 75 Chapter 5 Configuration Unicode Mapping Adding And Changing Unicode Values AY Important Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Propert
141. e KR 57 4 5 Using A Dialogue Box eA 58 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 43 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 4 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE NET for portable devices and desktop Windows 2000 XP etc utilize point and click navigation An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every point and click action Windows CE NET supports the same point and click user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference the point and click action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping provided your 8525 is equipped with a touchscreen 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus AN Note Ifthe touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately it may need recalibration Refer to Calibrating The Touchscreen on page 32 An 8525 equipped with a touchscreen has a stylus a pointing tool that looks like a pen that is used to select objects on the touchscreen L Note To prevent damage to the touchscreen use only the stylus pen supplied with your 8525 To open a file launch an applet or open a folder e Double tap the stylus on the appropriate icon To navigate through a dialogue box for example d
142. e assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal Reverse The value assigned to the Reverse parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal All Fld Video Usually the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field When this parameter is enabled set to Y the entire field including blanks takes on the video attributes Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with reverse video Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 207 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the options Entry Mode Entry Mode parameters allow you to select a data entry mode The modes are insert replace field and fcursor TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement on page 140 describes these modes in detail Open Fky Only When this parameter is enabled set to Y the screen is open for function keys only and the cursor is not positioned When this parameter is disabled the screen is o
143. e beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2 Scan tone 2 and Scan time 2 determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds can Tone 3 And Scan Time 3 Scan tone 3 and Scan time 3 determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Sounds Ctrl Panel This option displays the Volume amp Sounds Properties dialogue box Volume amp Sounds Properties o Volume Sounds Bluetooth Loud Enable sounds for Device V Events warnings beeps and system events M Applications program specific and all other sounds 9 Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Mouse Enable clicks and taps for Key clicks loud O Soft tp vl Soft vi Screen taps 0 loud O soft Remove D Programs Manag ler Scanners Start Tekrerm 2 Control Panel Patata Figure 6 9 Adjusting The Volume This dialogue box is used adjust the beeper volume and to select the conditions under which the 8525 will emit a beep 166 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel Important Refer to Volume And Sound Properties on page 79 for details AN about this dialogue box 6 17 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the
144. e bottom of the screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the Label F1 F10 parameter To edit a label Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function L Note Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 197 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Characters Colour Override L Note The menu is available only if your 8525 is equipped with a colour display 06 Colour Override Range Foreground Black see text Background White see text Foreground And Background When Colour Override is set to Y the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the TESS sessions These colour settings override the Default Colours set from within the View Manager menu Refer to Default Colours on page 175 for details The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black 6 20 2 3 Characters 05 Characters Range Char Set see text V Match Char 0 0 255 H Match Char 0 0 255 Fill Chr 46 0 255 Upper Case N Y N Char Set 06 Char Set 4 ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N
145. e function keys To access these keys press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt e To access function key lt F21 gt press the BLUE key followed by lt F1 gt e Press BLUE F2 to access Function key lt F22 gt and so on Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 133 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Softkey Function Keys 6 2 1 2 Softkey Function Keys To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters function keys lt F1 gt to lt F5 gt have been programmed to perform specific actions in the Tekterm menus Table 6 1 describes these function keys These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS and ANSI applications Important Tapping the stylus on the appropriate softkey label executes the function of the softkey providing that the labels are visible at the bottom of the 8525 screen See Softkeys on page 164 if they are not visible Function Key Softkey Function Fl NEXT Displays the next sub menu F2 PREV Displays the previous menu DEFLT Restores parameters to default settings even after SE pressing F4 to save the changes F4 SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value LITRL Literal mode allows special characters to be F5 entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings Table 6 1 Softkeys L Note The SAVE onscreen label only appears when a parameter
146. e left most position of that field In a right justified field the lt DEL gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Replace mode In both left and right justified fields the lt DEL gt key erases charac ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field The cursor remains in the same position in the field If the lt DEL gt key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the field the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Insert mode Fcursor mode In both left and right justified fields the lt DEL gt key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field If the lt DEL gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most position in the field the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information
147. e text Entry Mode field see text Open Fky Only N Y N Ign Bcode_fld N Y N Enh Edit Mode N Y N Valid Numerics see text Field Order This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields The next field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers When enabled set to Y the cursor moves according to field location If disabled set to N the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields 206 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Enter To FO The lt ENTER gt key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the lt ENTER gt key start a transmission from the 8525 When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the lt ENTER gt key to be interpreted as F0 which starts a transmission Enter On Arr When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field Video 06 Video Range Blink BLNK see text Bold ULIN see text Reverse REV see text Blink The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal Bold The valu
148. ed as AIAG Error Accept If the Err Accept and AIAG Strip parameters are enabled set to ON all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted If the Err Accept parameter is disabled and the AIAG Strip parameter is enabled set to ON the label data is not accepted Mod Checks Mod 43 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 43 check digit is calculated Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated None If you choose None a check is not executed Field Size Chars Field Size The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added If the field size is non zero only bar codes of that length are passed through Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 119 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 128 Settings Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Suffix Char EL Note The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if lt BKSP gt is pressed the usual action for that key is performed If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulat
149. ed to enable or disable power to the individual PC Card and SDIO slots in your unit 5 5 5 Stylus Properties L Note Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit If your screen appears to require recalibration contact your supervisor e In the Control Panel choose the Stylus icon File View 2 x 0 O b 9 9 w e c Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support C e2 4 a 2 d LA s 2 I 9 19 s Mouse Narrow Band Metwork and Owner Password PC Power Regional e Dial up Co Connection Settings BP en WE qa Hl A Jo System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp 4 Figure 5 21 Stylus Icon 82 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Setting Double Tap Sensitivity 5 5 5 1 Setting Double Tap Sensitivity e In the Double Tap tab follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen Stylus Properties Ele View Bluetooth Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both Device the speed and physical distance between taps 5 Mouse I S Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel PA Styl
150. en the screen is transmitted Replace mode In a left justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string in this case the lt BKSP gt key erases the char acter to the left of the cursor In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor and the cursor is shifted to the right by one position If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of the field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty that is any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the lt BKSP gt key in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted 142 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Status Message In a left justified field the lt BKSP gt function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless
151. entry field filled with spaces EL Note This operation is only performed on screens received from the host Data sent to the host remains unaffected Passthru Printing Setting this parameter to Y allows the host to send data directly to the 8525 serial port This option is most commonly used for printing AIAG Character This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the AIAG character A value of O zero disables this feature When a bar code data is scanned the 8525 searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data The application program distinguishes an entry field as AIAG by preceding the field with this special mode character which indicates the existence of AIAG fields Barcode Character Barcode input only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar code reader The application program identifies a barcode input only entry field by preceding the field with a special character 210 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the barcode input only character A value of O zero disables this feature Serial 10 Character Serial I O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port The application program distinguishes this field as Serial 1 O by
152. enu 153 Tekterm 153 Lcl Process 7 45 201 LED charge 34 functions 8525 33 receive 34 scan 35 transmit 34 LED Scan See Brightness 224 LF CR CTRLJ 189 LF character 90 Newline 790 Line Offset 222 Line Scrolling 224 LITERAL key FS 134 local editing mode ANSI 7 48 185 Local echo mode 188 menu 45 procedures 745 process 145 201 Save on Reset 207 LOCK B message 144 196 locked keyboard 186 202 locked 8525 200 LOCK H message 144 196 lock time decreasing with queuing mode 1 46 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Lower ANSI Host Char Set 193 LU Name 2 3 LU Name Enabled 2 3 2 5 LU Name Prefix 2 5 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Index M MAC address access point controller 757 MAC address 8525 151 Macro Keys 32 Macro keys accessing 134 executing a macro 74 Macros menu accessing 73 164 recording and saving 73 maintenance 8525 41 mapping keyboard Scan See 226 mapping viewport 22 match fields 738 MATM 187 Media Copy ANSD 186 memory resetting 759 menu local 45 Menu mode taskbar switching between apps 136 menus working with 53 message mask msk 1 52 messages enabling disabling next message 202 LOCK B 144 196 LOCK H 144 196 NEXT B 145 146 NEXT H 145 146 RESET Press Enter 137 Scan Indicator 774 scanner warning message 114 Scan Result 1 4 TESS sta
153. enu displays a dialogue box in which you can enter the name of the program folder or document you want to open or launch TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec E184c 81 Display Menu A Parameters 17 Type the name of a program folder or Z document and Windows will open it for you open Ix Cancel Browse Supervisor a 0 IES st Tekem PTXWLAGSAGEI FEIF EI Figure 4 14 Run Dialogue Box 4 4 1 Shutdown Choosing Shutdown displays a sub menu of options including Suspend Warm Reset and Cold Reset TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n r X d O Run amp warm Reset 52 a 1 cold Reset gt i Figure 4 15 Shutdown Sub Menu Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 57 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Using A Dialogue Box L Note This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen When the 8525 is set to User level the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend A sub menu is not available At Teklogix security level an additional option is available in the sub menu Bootloader This option behaves like cold reset except that the 8525 starts Bootloader rather than Windows CE NET Suspend The Suspend option suspends the 8525 immediately this is equivalent to turning the vehicle mount off Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the 8525 leaving all saved files and registry settings intact Any unsaved data is lost Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets
154. er 4 Working With Windows CE NET Shortcuts 4 4 4 Shortcuts TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 1 Display Menu T rs 4 Desktop a Security m om ii Programs LI Shortcuts gt Eb system Tray E ual Settings ems Tasks RO EE O gun f Task Manager A Y a Da i Figure 4 11 Shortcuts Sub Menu The System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon and the security level These indicators are attached to dialogue boxes that provide additional information e Choose System Tray from the Start Menu When System Tray is chosen the taskbar icons become accessible To display the dialogue box attached to an icon e Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon for example the security icon e Press ENTER to display the security level dialogue box Cyde Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected and the Task Manager is not open you can cycle through active applications To choose this option Choose Cycle Tasks or e Press ALT TAB Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 55 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Settings The Task Manager The Task Manager option allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task To display the task manager window e Tapon Task Manager in the Start Menu or e Press ALT lt ESC gt
155. es the display if the host echoes are different The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25 Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed When the 8525 is in insert mode smart echo is disabled Key Function In newline mode this key moves the cursor to the first ENTER column of the next line In line feed mode this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line CTRL G Bell The 8525 beeps CTRL H Backspace The cursor moves back one space CTRL I Tab The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop CTRL J Line Feed CTRL L Form Feed The cursor moves down one line in the same column CTRL K Vertical The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical Tab tab set This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor BEL and moves the cursor to the left by one position Table 6 4 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode DEL Key This parameter determines whether the DEL key acts as a delete key erasing the character to the right of the cursor or a backspace key erasing the character to the left of the cursor or as a clear key erasing the contents of a field BKSP Key This parameter determines whether the lt BKSP gt key acts as a backspace key erasing the character to the left of the cursor as a delete key erasing the character to the right of the cursor or as a clear key erasing the contents of a field Psion Teklogix
156. et to Y a request is sent to the network controller to assign a radio address to the vehicle mount computer radio If Auto Radio Addr is set to N the value entered in the Radio Address parameter is used Refer to Radio Address in this section for details about manually assigned radio addresses N Important Ensure that all 8525s grouped in the system use the same addressing process that is if you choose to use automatic radio addressing use this addressing process for all units operating in the same system If you choose to assign radio addresses manually using the Radio Address parameter use this process for all units in the same system Radio Address The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the 8525 over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each 8525 vehicle mount computer 162 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application System Parameters Initial RTT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between a vehicle mount computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement Each 8525 continuously adjusts the accept able round trip time calculating the average elapsed time over a number of trans missions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the computer will send the transmission again Because 8525s cannot calculate an
157. ete 20f5 125 Disp controls 792 display Anchor Column 222 Anchor Line 222 Anchor View 793 209 appearance colour scheme 69 background control panel 68 backlight 69 Index Brightness 224 Display Properties 68 Display Shift 769 Field Scroll 796 ICH DCH controls 797 Line Scrolling 224 moving 169 Origin Scroll 196 Panning 224 positioning 196 split screens 170 Use Increment 769 video attributes 183 207 viewport mapping 22 Wraparound 224 X Increment 7 69 Y Increment 7 69 displaying TESS version number 143 Display Menu selecting a TESS session 138 Display menu 153 Display Properties 68 Display Shift 769 Dot Time 5 double click appending characters to a decoded barcode 115 scanner trigger 115 Double Tap stylus settings 83 DUN service Bluetooth 99 E EAN UCC 128 1720 EAN 13 720 EAN 8 121 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 20 Echo Mode 88 Edit extent 797 editing 185 Edit Modes 191 192 edit modes TESS 740 empty entry fields 200 Emulation 2392 Telnet 209 AIAG Character 2 0 Barcode Character 2 0 Clear Entry Fields 2 0 Command Region Up Down Left Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Index 6 amp Right 2 Enable Alarm 2 7 Features 2 0 Fixed Field Overhd 2 Passthru Printing 2 0 Send CR with FKEY 209 Serial IO Character 2 3274 Telnet 2 2 BRK for Attn 2 3 Features 2 3 FKEYO 39 2 4 Fujitsu Host 2 2 Intl EBCDIC 272 IP for SysReq 2 2 LU Name 2 3 LU Name Enabled 2
158. etooth Radio If a Bluetooth radio is installed in your 8525 this icon is displayed in the taskbar Security Level Security levels can be set to limit user access to 8525 settings In addition applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes AC Power Icon This AC icon is displayed in the taskbar when the unit is using AC power 3 6 3 Audio Indicators The 8525 beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected or an operator s entry does not match in a match field EL Note Refer to Volume And Sound Properties on page 79 for details about the Volume amp Sound Properties dialogue box Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 37 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Scanning 3 1 Scanning The scanner used with your unit is configured using the Scanner Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel AN Note Refer to Scanner Properties Setup on page 114 for details The 8525 supports a variety of scanners one dimensional 1D laser scanners Scanning Techniques outlines the mechanics of a successful scan In addition review Scan LED Indicators on page 38 to better understand how to interpret whether or not a bar code has been successfully scanned Finally Troubleshooting on page 39 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail 3 7 1 Sca
159. etransmissions 152 Retries 220 reverse video attribute 183 207 Rjct if Alpha 206 rm received messages 151 round trip time rt 152 TOWS number of in ANSI screen 1 82 number of in TESS screen 796 rt round trip time 152 Run Start Menu 57 S safeguards 233 safety instructions general X scanner 37 safety warning scanner 37 SATM 187 SAVE key F4 134 Save on Reset 207 Scan Bad 774 Scan Good 1 4 Scan Indicator 1 4 Scan Log File 774 scanner aiming target dot duration 7 5 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending data 115 bar code appending data to 115 Click Data appending data 115 Click Time double click 715 Cont Nxt Fld 205 disabling the scanner 790 Dot Time 5 double click 1 5 one dimensional 1D internal scanner 38 parameters for TESS Settings 205 safety warnings 37 Scan Bad 1 4 Scan Good 114 Scan Log File 4 Scan Result Time 4 target dot duration 715 12 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual techniques scanning 37 TESS Scanner parameters 205 troubleshooting tips 38 warning message 114 scanning AIAG 206 aiming target dot duration 7 5 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending characters 71 5 119 121 check digit 120 123 124 125 Click Data appending data 115 Click Time 5 Cont Nxt Fld 205 country code 720 Dot Time 5 double click 1 5 Input translate 127 locked 8525 206 number system digit 122 123 Output translate 127 prefix character 7 8 121 rem
160. ext to the dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available Tap the stylus on the arrow to display the options in the menu Checkbox This box allows you to select or deselect an option To select or deselect a checkbox tap the stylus on the checkbox to select V or deselect it Radio buttons These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options For example in the sample screen in Figure 4 16 on page 59 you can choose to Obtain an IP address via DHCP or Specify an IP address Tap the stylus on the button to select or deselect it Buttons This type of button allows you to Save Delete and so on the options you ve chosen in a dialogue box Tap the stylus on the button to activate it Saving Your Choices Once you ve made all your changes tap on OK to save your changes and exit the window L Note A dialogue box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not currently available Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 59 CONFIGURATION 5 1 Remote Desktop Connection lees 63 52 Pocket PC Compatibility eee 63 3x3 The Control Panel 5 sosse wong eek og meg OE Row 63 5 4 Control Panel ICOS sa en 64 5 5 Basic SODA ae E oo es Be a 68 5 5 1 Display Properties o 000000004 68 5 5 1 1 Display Background o o o 68 5 5 1 2 Display Appearance les 69 5 5 1 3 Display Backlight lll
161. ey Index assigning 20 network authentication 19 Network Key 20 Network Key assigning 20 wireless information 17 wireless properties 18 802 1X authentication 20 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 11 Index Connect button 77 Initial RTT WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 163 228 IP address assigning 2 name servers 22 preferred networks arranging 23 Protocol Type 763 Radio Address narrow band radio 228 Radio Address WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 162 signal quality 36 statistics screen 802 1Q 150 wireless connection setting up 15 802 10 statistics screen 750 Radio Addr Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio 227 Radio Address 762 228 narrow band radio 228 WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 762 802 1Q v1 162 radio address automatic 802 IQ v1 762 radio specifications 245 radio statistics screen 802 1Q 150 rb received beacons 151 recalibrating touchscreen 32 83 received acknowledgements 151 received beacons rb 151 received messages rm 151 receive LED 34 Remap Underline To 2 5 Remote Desktop Connection 55 remote desktop connection 63 Repeat Delay between key repeats 77 Repeat Rate of key repeats 77 Repeat tab key repeat settings 71 Replace mode 140 replace mode 208 reprinting a page 144 RESET Press Enter message 137 resetting default parameter values 159 TESS session 144 8525 memory 159 resetting the 8525 24 response time improving with queuing mode 146 retransmissions 802 IQv1 xr See xr r
162. f Keys In Block Mode 148 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Working With Sessions 6 8 5 Working With Sessions AN Important Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the TCP gt prompt 6 8 5 1 Establishing A New Session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type telin lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address e Press lt ENTER gt e Log inas usual to begin working with the new session 6 8 5 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions To list the current sessions e Press CTRL and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type sess in lowercase letters and press lt ENTER gt To move to another session e At the TCP gt prompt type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move e g Type sess 2 to move to session 2 e Press ENTER 6 8 5 3 Closing A Session To close a session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a e At the TCP gt prompt type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close e g Type cl 2 to close session 2 e Press lt ENTER gt Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 149 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Printing A Screen 6 8 5 4 Printing A Screen To print each line of a screen with a CR LF between each line e Press CTRL and type p The sc
163. forklift power 12 6V Li Ion standard battery for brown out Advance Smart Battery Built in fast charger 1 week real time clock backup SNMP MIB 2 support for future release e Remote software download Remote WLAN management Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 1 3 2 The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer DESI PS ION TEKLOGIX F pe d Windows CE nat CI 2 0 A 0000000000000 oooooooooococmooQ ri 2 a 0S am O O dE 0 0 Figure 1 1 8525 With Qwerty Keyboard 8 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 8525 Ports 1 3 3 8525 Ports Auxiliary Port Tether Port RS232 Serial Port Figure 1 2 Ports 1 3 4 Regulatory Labels e Warning Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 a N5 53 FCC ID GM3RA2020M IC 2739D RA2020 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules ation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and FOR HOME OR 2 this device must accept any interference received OFFICE USE including interference that may cause undesired operation 8 Figure 1 3 FCC Label Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory L
164. g Between Applications 136 6 6 The Tekterm Status Area sea eA 137 6 7 TESS Emulation s se ee ce eiernes Le RR T E T 137 67 1 Config uratioD 2 oy oe c ee xe n RO RUE ROS pu XR UTR IE e 138 6 7 2 Working With Multiple Sessions o o o ooo 138 6 1 3 The Field Types e es sar as oe 138 6 7 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys o o o oo o 139 6 7 5 DataEntty isc cs ee eb ba ee ieee eee eee YE SX 139 6 7 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 140 6 7 5 2 DEL Key Behaviour In TESS 0 141 6 7 5 3 lt BKSP gt Key BehaviourInTESS 142 6 7 6 TESS Status Message o o e e e 143 6 7 7 Lock Messages cse a Bek Bw a A EL 144 6 7 8 Control Commands 0 000000 0 144 6 79 Resetting A TESS Session lees 144 6 7 10 The Local Men ss ss eaae paea a Bf EA RREEG 145 6 7 11 Selecting Another Host Computer llle 145 6 7 12 Queuing Mode ask sur eom oer Ro RR eee nne 146 6 8 ANSI Emulation 5 29 pL RR REUTERS 146 6 8 1 ConfisSuration s 2 os ace Roo or ee RE ORDER 9 146 6 8 2 Sending Data To The Host llle 147 6 8 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 147 6 8 4 Block Mode Local Editing o 148 6 8 5 Working With Sessions 149 6 8 5 1 Establishing A New Session o 149 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 129 6 8 5 2 Listing Sessions And Movin
165. g To Other Sessions 149 6 8 5 3 Closing A Session s ss c sa an sace o a ewe apdo 149 6 85 4 Printing A Screen sooo sese o o m 150 6 8 5 5 Smart Echo Disabling illl 150 6 9 The Radio Statistics Screen en 150 6 9 1 802 10 Stats Screen o a cocos rt RA 151 6 9 2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen o o 152 6 10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu llle 153 6 11 Working With Menus 0 000000000004 153 6 11 1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 154 6 11 1 1 Sub Menus o o e e 154 6 11 1 2 Numeric Parameters e sos co o o o 154 6 11 1 3 Y N Parameters o soe c hee c m RR 154 6 11 1 4 Alpha Parameters leen 155 6 11 1 5 String Entry Parameters o o 155 6 11 2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus 155 6 11 21 Sub Menus oe csee eA 155 6 11 2 2 Numeric Parameters ooa 156 6 11 2 3 Y N Parameters 242 006 8 RR RR 156 6 11 2 4 Alpha Parameters o oo e 156 6 11 2 5 String Entry Parameters o o o 156 6 11 3 Saving Changes To Parameters o o o c ceca et oa ea o o 158 6 11 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values 159 6 12 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 159 6 13 The Parameters Menu xaos cecs reau eraa a a e e ae A a aa 159 6 13 1 Security SettidgS o aes domaa a eee eee e E 160
166. g lst 10000 0 fr 00 ar 00 fh 00 ah 00 ca 0 tn 0 sts 0 typ 0 msk 0 0 0 AcQ 1 TxQ 1 Address Info Radio Address O0 End of statistics 802 10 Stats Screen AP Controller mac MAC address of the Teklogix access point controller with which this 8525 is currently associated Terminal MAC MAC address of the 8525 vehicle mount computer bootnum e g C33B the boot number of the network controller This number increments each time the controller reboots so that 8525s can detect the reboot when they reinitialize rm number of unique received messages xm number of unique transmitted messages rb number of received beacons This number should contin uously increment xi number of initializations with the network controller ra number of received acknowledgements Normally this number should match the value in xm xa number of transmitted acknowledgements Normally this number should match the value in rm Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 151 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen bt beacon timeouts Number of times the beacon has not been received as expected XT number of retransmissions This number should remain low if radio coverage is adequate e rt average round trip time This number represents the milli seconds taken to send a message and receive a response from the base station Cellular Protocol message numbers fr fo
167. ger than the field length to continue in the next field If ContNxtField is disabled set to N OFF data will flow into the next field Append Enter When enabled set to Y Append Enter causes an ENTER code to be appended to the bar code The ENTER code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field Append FO When enabled set to Y this parameter causes an F0 code to be appended to the bar code The F0 code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 205 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Mixed AIAG When this parameter is enabled set to Y AIAG labels are always accepted and processed even if mixed with keyboard input The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data If this parameter is disabled AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress Rict if Alpha When the cursor is in a numeric field and Rjct if Alpha is enabled set to Y bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected Beam Lockout When enabled set to Y this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in LOCK H mode 6 20 2 7 Fields 05 Fields Rang Field Order Y Y N Enter To FO Y Y N Enter On Arrow Y Y N Video see text All Fld Video Y Y N Default Font 16x30 se
168. gh the Tether or Console port Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 217 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 6 21 2 Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings The parameters for the Tether Port Serial Port and Console Port are identical 04 Settings Rang Character Set see text Baud 9600 see text for range of baud rates Data Bits 8 6 8 Parity none none odd even mark space Stop Bits 1 1 1 5 2 Flow Ctrl None None Software Hardware Both Buffer 512 1 2048 Retries 3 1 100 Input Tmo 2 1 100 Output Tmo 5 1 100 Test Y Y N Character Set These menus define the character set for the 8525 port N Important When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a right arrow character is used as a substitute r Char Set ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer In this menu the Y or N are used to visually guide you to the selected character set For example in the sample menu above the Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group 218 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings Choosing A Character Set To choose a ch
169. gional Settings The Background tab allows you to adjust the 8525 display background e In the Display Properties dialogue box open the Background tab Display Properties gt Background Appearance Backlight Bluetooth Device Image AA C Tile image on background Figure 5 3 Display Contrast Properties Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp amp jStart TekTerm 2 Control Panel PF Display Properties Si als This option allows you to change the background colour or add an image 68 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Display Appearance 5 5 1 2 Display Appearance In the Display Properties dialogue box open the Appearance tab Display Properties o Background Appearance Backlight Bluetooth Device Nindow cr Standard s y Save i Delete Apply Mouse Active Window ika i Dialog Box Text 2 y Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp amp jStart TekTerm Control Panel I 3 Display Properties Six a Figure 5 4 Display Appearance Properties This dialogue box allows you to customize the display colour scheme 5 5 1 3 Display Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when the 8525 is in use key press scanner trigger or data received from the
170. gix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate e Match the side screw holes on the 8525 with the appropriate pairs of holes on the cradle and screw them together The choice of holes determines the angle at which the terminal tilts Screw Holes o E To E ii 5 25 cm Quick Release eek 1 E in Fasteners less gt en _ gt Figure 7 2 Mounting Cradle And Quick Release Installing The Cradle Mounting Plate Next the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle The cradle mounting plate shown in Figure 7 3 holds the 8525 and cradle in place e Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1 4 holes Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 235 L Note The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1 4 20 Post Figure 7 3 The Cradle Mounting Plate Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting Plate Next the 8525 and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate e Align the tabs on the front of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting plate and push the cradle back and down e Slide the fasteners on the back of the cradle until they snap to the posts on the mounting plate e Warning Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are not locked Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount 1 4 3 Insta
171. h the value set at the network controller L Note When using 802 10 v2 make certain that the 8525 Net Mask matches the network controller net mask More Parameters N Important The 802 10 radio items listed in this menu are only available to Psion Teklogix personnel m 05 802 10 v2 Parameters Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 to 3840 Initial RTT 100 500 5000 Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is set to Y the 8525 requests an automatically assigned radio address L Note f Auto Radio Addr is enabled set to Y any value assigned to the Radio Address parameter is ignored Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 227 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 10 v2 Radio Address AN Important Radio Address only takes effect when Cellular is enabled set to Y The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the 8525 vehicle mount over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each 8525 Initial RIT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between an 8525 vehicle mount computer trans mission and an access point acknowledgement Each 8525 continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the 8525
172. hat will be used by the host to identify visible match field data Enter O zero to disable this feature L Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream H Match Chr This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The 8525 beeps if the entered data does not match Hidden field matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify hidden match field data Enter O zero to disable this feature L Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 199 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tests Fill Chr This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character The most commonly used characters are underline Enter 95 period Enter 46 L Note 8525s in some systems may use the space character with the host using reverse video attributes to mark entry fields Upper Case When this parameter is enabled set to Y lowercase input is converted to uppercase 620 24 Tests 05 Tests Range Au
173. he Unicode Consortium You can create up to 20 Unicode characters that will be stored in a pop up menu accessible from any application 6 19 2 1 Creating A Unicode Character L Note You can create a Unicode character by pressing and holding down the ALT while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode character you want to use However you will need to press ALT and retype the decimal value each time you want to use the special character 172 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window The advantage to creating special characters using the Custom Chars parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters table are saved in a pop up window that is accessible from any application e Inthe Parameters menu highlight View Manager and press lt F1 gt e Highlight Custom Chars and press F1 to display the custom characters table m 04 Custom Chars 4 Font Small U 0000 U 0000 Position the cursor on Font at the top of the table e Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys until the character set you want to use is displayed You can create up to 20 Unicode characters in the custom characters table To create a Unicode value e Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode character you want to use Press the DOWN
174. he available bar code symbologies can be selected from this tab A Important To improve the decode speed and performance enable set to ON only those codes that are required by the application Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 117 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Settings The bar code settings do not affect the operation of external decoded scanners These scanners must be configured by scanning special configuration bar codes These configuration bar codes affect the communication speed or data format between the scanner and the 8525 and must not be changed The scanner manufacturer provides programming manuals for configuration purposes e For Symbol refer to Programming Guide P300 e For PSC refer to Powerscan Programming Guide PSC File View E Properties ok x 2 x Options Barcodes Translations R Ss 2 1 D thi Certificates Date T d IPv6 Keyboard Enabled on Support A i Full ASCII off Sd hb gt Include Check off Mouse Network and Owr AIAG Strip off Regional Remove Dial up Co Error Accept off Settings Programs s Mod Checks None e i dias Size Chars El Storage Stylus Syste E A Start c Control Panel Figure 5 69 Code 39 Bar Code Settings A plus sign to the left of the each bar code listed in this Barcodes tab indicate that that a sub menu of parameters is attached To work with a sub menu e Tapon the
175. host The Display Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the display will maintain the specified intensity EL Note Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only In the Display Properties dialogue box open the Backlight tab File view Display Properties Background Appearance Bluetooth Intensity Device i TD A 2 mnutes E A i naar 2 L anana f2minutes 7 minutes When using external power keep Mouse the backlight always ON Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp amp jStart TekTerm Control Panel A Display Properties isd Pl Figure 5 5 Display Backlight Properties EL Note Backlight changes take affect immediately You do not need to reset the 8525 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 69 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the backlight Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity and sliding it to the right raises the intensity Bright For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity when a unit is not in use Dim For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity d
176. host select 144 CTRLi 7 40 CTRL I Tab 189 CTRL J Line Feed 189 CTRL K Vertical Tab 759 CTRLL 7 45 CTRL L Form Feed 759 CTRL p reprint 744 CTRLr 140 CTRLs 143 CTRL s status displaying continuously 144 CTRLt 143 CTRL t status display with unit 144 CTRLu 140 CTRLw 1 43 CTRL Key 3 cursor changing shape of 769 Enh Edit mode 208 Field Order 206 linefeed mode ANSI 1 89 moving between fields 188 206 newline mode ANSI 1 89 Custom Characters 172 cycle tasks 55 D data entering 139 208 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Ign Bcode fld 208 with a bar code reader 23 serial O 204 Serial In Out 203 transmitting from the terminal 190 207 transmitting from the 8525 139 185 Data Bits 219 data stream type typ 52 DEC Cursor Keys ANSI Keyboard parameter 9 decimal values of keys 200 decoding bar codes decodes required 7 6 Security 116 decrementing parameters 154 156 Default Colour 175 Default font 782 208 DEFAULT key F3 134 DEFLT key F3 759 DEL CLR key Local Echo mode ANSI 1 89 DEL Key 31 DEL key DEL key ANSI 789 desktop connection remote 63 Dev Attr 185 device attribute requests 147 device attribute string 755 Device Name changing 102 dialogue box using 56 digit check digit 120 123 124 125 number system 1 22 123 Dim For backlight 70 Disable kbd 90 disabling enabling Y N parameters 154 156 disconnecting ESC Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Discr
177. ies dialogue box e Tap on the Add Change button Bluetooth Device D Mouse Storage pm Start 1 TekTerm 2 Control Panel Keyboard Properties SXM i alge Figure 5 13 Adding And Change Unicode Values e Tap ona value in the Unicode mapping list in the sample screen above a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 VK 0 e Tap the stylus in the Unicode Mapping field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key EL Note To add a shifted state lt SHIFT gt and or lt CTRL gt tap the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed to select y the shift state you want to assign Removing Unicode Values e Inthe Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and tap the stylus on the Remove button 76 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping 5 5 2 6 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK_F represents the F key VK_RETURN represents the lt ENTER ON gt key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume contrast etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mapp
178. ight threshold and intensity Additional tabs also allow the configuration of macros and scanner key remapping JO Volume amp Sound Volume amp Allows you to adjust the volume of the beep that is emitted to indicate Sounds f events like warnings key clicks and screen taps Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons Sounds wave files cannot be reproduced on 8525 units The beeper volume and the conditions under which it sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit Mouse Properties Mouse Allows you to customize the sensitivity and speed of the stylus double tap Q2 Owner Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up Network ID tab information is used to access network resources This information should be provided by your System Administrator Password Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit Once assigned password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place Refer to Security Levels on page 51 for details Allows you to switch to Suspend state define which Card Slots are active and to turn power for the card slots PCMCIA and SD MMC on and off Note that a battery status tab is visible only when the 8525 is set to the Teklogix security leve
179. ii os xh qt Reg ii A 35 3 6 1 4 API User Application LED 35 3 6 2 Onscreen Indicators lt s s e med u wio meon a E e 35 3 6 3 Audio Indicators es ee e ee eea aee de e 37 3 7 SCannihg e a a lou das eg ed wm dw e E ee we Rod eed a E 38 3 7 1 Scanning Techniques raees lees 38 3 7 2 Scan LED Indicators o e o 38 3 7 3 Troubleshooting ro cone eses 39 3 7 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 39 3 8 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 40 3 9 Monitoring The Network Connection 04 40 3 10 Connecting An 85225 TOA PC cacca lee 4l 3 10 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files 42 3 11 General Maintenance e 42 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen o o 42 3 11 2 Cleaning he8525 ie o dex dox AA 43 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 25 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Features Of The 8525 3 1 Features Of The 8525 Inside The Radio Dome SDIO MMC Slot for Bluetooth radio or additional storage memory PCMCIA slot supports 2 Type Il PCMCIA or 1 Type III PCMCIA card Compact Flash slot for 802 1 1b radios or additional storage memory Radio Dome PER E KLOGIX 2 Windows CE n amp t Figure 3 1 Front Of 8525 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 27 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Internal Backup Bat
180. immed backlight when a unit is not in use External Power Checkbox When you select V the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when the 8525 is operating with external power not internal battery power If the 8525 is drawing power from a battery this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialogue box take affect 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the BLUE and ORANGE modifier keys This dialogue box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters e In the Control Panel choose the Keyboard icon File View x 5 1 PY AD Q Mo e ES D R Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support e 2 p 1 4 3 1 Mouse Narrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional Radio iDia up Co Connection Settings o O Ys m amp o L Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Tits sr a eae 0L amp Stat A ControlPane uw ol s 9 Figure 5 6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 5 2 Chapter 5 Configuration Key Repeat Key Repeat e In the Keyboard
181. in bar code without an addendum Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 121 Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 8 Prefix Suffix Chars Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added EL Note The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if lt BKSP gt is pressed the usual action for that key is per formed If your 8525 is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application the vehicle mount transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added 5 924 EAN 8
182. in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen this key is locked on the 8525 will not switch off Press the BLUE key again to unlock it then press BLUE lt ENTER ON gt to switch the 8525 off If however you ve disabled the Blue Key in the One Shot dia logue box see Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 72 the 8525 can be turned off even when the BLUE key is locked on 3 4 The Keyboard The 8525 offers three keyboard layouts Qwerty ABC and Azerty Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted 3 4 1 Modifier Keys The lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt ALT BLUE and ORANGE keys are modifier keys Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed For example a square bracket is printed in orange print above the 4 key Pressing the ORANGE key followed by the 4 key displays a square bracket rather than the number 4 The lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 29 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Activating Modifier Keys 3 4 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key
183. ing a Wild Card asterisk 172 Split Screen 770 Standard Code 128 720 Start ANSI 192 Start Menu 50 cycle tasks 55 desktop 50 programs 53 Run 57 Security 31 Settings 56 Shutdown 57 system tray 55 task manager 56 start up menu 755 statistics screen 802 1Q 150 status displaying continuously 144 status displaying unit 144 status area Tekterm 137 status message TESS 143 Stop Bits 2 9 string entry parameters 155 156 157 adding special characters to 157 cycling through special characters 157 key function description 155 156 Strip Leading 779 121 Strip Trailing 779 121 sts session status 152 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual stylus touch pen using 45 Stylus Properties 82 Double tap stylus sensitivity 83 sub menus accessing 134 155 suffix serial I O 204 suffix serial I O 204 Suffix Char 1 9 121 Supervisor security level 51 support services 4 Suspend Shutdown menu 38 suspending power 81 Suspend State 8 symbologies TATA 2 0f5 126 symbologies bar code 116 displaying type of bar code 114 System parameters Tekterm 163 system tray 35 T tab CTRL D 189 tab vertical CTRL K 789 TAB Key 31 Tab stop mode 797 target dot duration of 115 taskbar onscreen indicators modifier keys 36 power AC 36 radio signal quality 36 security level 36 using 48 task manager 56 TCP Direct connection 177 195 Teklogix security level 57 Tekterm 133 Telnet connection 177 195 Telnet connect
184. ings the Normal table the Blue table and the Orange table The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the Blue table defines key presses that occur when the lt BLUE gt modifier is on the Orange table defines key presses that occur when the lt ORANGE gt modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialogue box Keyboard Properties Bluetooth Device A 2 Mouse Remove All Storage gt y zy Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel Keyboard Properties SXM i GU Figure 5 14 Scancode Remapping The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexidecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number e g Macro 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 77 Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping Adding A Remap To add a new remapping e Tap the stylus on the Add button at the bottom of the dialogue box The Remap Scancode dialogue box is displayed
185. ion ANSI 177 terminal Terminal ANSI 77 Terminal ANSI 177 Terminal TESS 194 Terminal 8525 mac displaying 151 Terminal Type ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Term Type 2 5 TESS 137 of Cols 196 Index of Rows 196 All Fld Video 207 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 Applications menu 175 BKSP key behaviour 741 Blink video attrib 207 Bold video attrib 207 Colour Override 1 98 configuration 38 Conn Type connection type 195 Cont Nxt Fld 205 CTRL commands 7 40 cursor movement in edit modes 740 DEL key behaviour 42 displaying version number 43 Display menu using 138 edit modes 740 Enh Edit Mode 208 Enter On Arr 207 Enter To FO 207 208 Entry Mode 208 Fcursor mode 140 Field mode 740 Field Order 206 Field parameters 206 Host Connection Type 795 Ign Bcode fld 208 Insert mode 740 Kbd Locked 202 keyboardlock 202 matching fields via data stream 199 milestone 202 modes edit 140 multiple sessions 175 number of columns in screen 196 number of rows in screen 196 Pages Saved 197 Port 195 query command 197 Replace mode 40 resetting a TESS session 144 Reverse video attrib 207 running multiple sessions 38 selecting a session 138 settings 194 209 status message 143 switching between hosts 201 Terminal 194 Tests 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 15 Index Valid Numerics 208 video attributes 207 802 10 connection 195 9010t connectio
186. ion application the 8525 transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added EL Note For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added 5 9 2 2 Code 128 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 or off to disable it Include Sym Setting Include Sym to ON causes the group separator s and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen A Note This option is available only when EAN UCC 128 is selected Variations When using Code 128 you can choose the variation or type of bar code variation the scanner will recognize The options available are Standard UCC and EAN UCC These options are described below 120 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Ma
187. ional Dial up Co Connection Settings Dd gt w m 3o J Remove Storage System Teklogix MA Total Recall Volume amp 7 Start Control Panel uw all E s 9 Figure 5 66 Teklogix Scanners Icon 5 9 1 Scanner Options File View Scanner Properties OK E gt x o 2 Options Barcodes Translations I lt gt 2 1 Certificates Date Tin IPv6 Keyboard Support Double Click cm e e2 Options P hb A Mouse Network and Owner Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs e y y Storage Stylus Systerr Figure 5 67 Bar Code Options To display the sub menus available in the Options tab e Tap on the symbol to the left of the option with which you want to work To change a parameter e Double tap on the parameter or press the SPACE key If a field requires text entry a text field is displayed in which you can type the appropriate value 114 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Options Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled set to ON the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen can Indicator When this parameter is enabled set to ON the
188. is sent to the host in the next response message Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt DEL gt key operates in the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 141 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS 6 1 5 3 lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode Ina left justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the left When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed when the field is empty the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key does not delete data pre filled by the host applica tion If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed in a field that has not been modified the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is completed the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or wh
189. isk As A Wild Card 6 19 1 4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card When a screen is split the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the View IDs parameter Using an asterisk in the View IDs parameter indicates that a particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can be changed as required For example suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the left pane containing the Parameters menu and the right pane containing no fixed application The Type and View IDs parameters would be completed as follows 042 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs A To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application e If the cursor is not currently in the pane press lt CTRL gt RIGHT or LEFT arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt to display the startup Display Menu e Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display 6 19 2 Custom Characters Unicode L Note The Unicode characters created here are accessible only within the Tekterm application To create Unicode characters that are accessible system wide refer to Unicode Mapping on page 75 The Custom Characters parameter allows you to create Unicode M characters not available directly from the keyboard including accented characters Unicode is a trademark of T
190. isplay the information in a tab choose a radio button check V a checkbox and so on e Tap the stylus on a tab radio button checkbox and so on Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 45 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Navigating Using The Keyboard 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard If your touchscreen has been disabled you can use the keyboard rather than a stylus to choose icons and navigate dialogue boxes display the desktop and so on If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup you ll have little need for keyboard navigation Operation Key or Key Combination Switch between active applications lt ALT gt lt TAB gt Open task manager lt ALT gt lt ESC gt Move the cursor Atrow keys Open file folder or icon lt ENTER gt Exit amp Save lt ENTER gt Close Exit amp Do Not Save lt ESC gt lt TAB gt To move cursor up lt SHIFT gt lt TAB gt To display the contents of the next tab in a dialogue box lt CTRL gt lt TAB gt Select Radio Button Press Button lt SPACE gt Navigate Dialogue Boxes Go to Start Menu lt BLUE gt lt 0 gt Table 4 1 Keyboard Navigation Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer the 8525 does not support key chording pressing two keys at the same time You must press one key followed by the next in sequence Refer to Working With Files Folders And Programs on page 47 for
191. isplayed in the list even when it is not detected during the scan The PIN column indicates whether you have a PIN password set for the device Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 99 At this point you can either query for services or set the PIN for each device Once you highlight a device in the list box both the Services and Set PIN buttons become available Services A discovered device may display several service profiles that it can use to communicate and you will want to activate the type you need Supported profiles that can be activated include DUN Dial Up Networking service Printer serial service and LANPPP LANAccessUsingPPP service ASync ActiveSync is another available profile e To start the service scan highlight a device in the Devices tab list and then click on the Services button or double click on the device entry EL Note If the remote device is out of reach or turned off it can take a consider able amount of time for the Services dialogue box to appear it may appear to be frozen Once the device s service profiles are displayed in the Services list box Highlight the desired service and then click on Activate or Deactivate as required Once the service is successfully activated the assigned port if applicable will appear in the Port column of the Services list box You can choose to use BSP or COM as the port name BSP is the latest Microsoft Bluetooth stack standard
192. its a CR When enabled set to Y an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line The ENTER key transmits both a CR and an LF Disable kbd Setting this parameter to Y disables the keyboard and scanner When this parameter is set to N the keyboard and scanner are enabled 190 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Edit Modes DEC Cursor Keys This parameter can be set to either Cursor Mode or Appl Mode Cursor Mode causes the cursor keys to generate ANSI cursor control sequences Application Mode causes the cursor keys to send application control functions 6 20 1 5 Edit Modes r 04 Edit Modes Range Auto wrap N Y N Erasure mode N Y N Tab stop mode N Y N Edit extent Line see text Disp controls N Y N Auto wrap If Auto wrap is disabled set to N characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters If Auto wrap is enabled set to Y the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin Erasure mode When this parameter is disabled set to N erase functions can only erase unprotected characters When enabled set to Y the erase functions can erase characters regardless of their protected state
193. keep the backlight always ON Bluetooth Device Storage Start Tekrem J Control Panel Keyboard Properties Figure 5 8 Keyboard Backlight Properties Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 8525 keyboard backlight Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity ON For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on when a unit is not in use A Note Tapping in the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON N forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power such as vehicle battery or A C adaptor 5 5 3 Keyboard One Shot Modes e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the One Shots tab Bluetooth Device Keyboard Properties ok x Repeat Backlight One Shots macros l Unicode Mapping l Scancode Remapping JE gt One Shot Modes Storage Start Tekrem J Control Panel Keyboard Properties Figure 5 9 Keyboard One Shot Properties 72 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys When these options are enabled V the lt ORANGE gt and BLUE keys only remain active until the next key is pressed If the One Shots option
194. klogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Features Colour display 1 2VGA 640x240 Transmissive TFT industrial temp 30 C to 85 C 8 8 inch 18 bit Sunlight readable Embedded Memory Display controller resolution 16bpp Touchscreen passive stylus or finger operation signature capture Keyboards 3 integrated keyboard formats ABC 10 Function Keys Qwerty 10 Function Keys Azerty 10 Function Keys 68 key PC like format green EL backlight ergonomic dedicated function keys e Indicators and Controls internal 95 dBA beeper with volume control 4 indicators RX TX API SCAN PWR CHG RFID Applications for future release tethered readers writers Future addition long range 900 MHz PC card RFID reader writer multi protocol support e Internal Expansion Slots one SD I O Multimedia Card slot one Type II Compact Flash two Type Il one Type III PCMCIA slot s 6 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Features easy access to slots via sealed end cap e External Ports One Tether port with one RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer undecoded scanner port USB host port One Port with DB9 plug RS232 One Port with High density socket one RS222 serial comm port USB device port 2USB host ports e Power Management Internal power supply 10 90VDC designed for
195. l A Regional Settings Regional Allows you to specify the local language the display text will use along with the format of numbers currency time and date for your region to Remove Programs Remove Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit To remove a pro Programs i gram select it and then click on the Remove button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 65 Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons E Stylus Stylus Adjusts how Windows CE NET recognizes your double tap as slow or rapid successive taps Under the Calibration tab you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the calibration screen a System System Displays system and memory properties Under the Memory tab you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory Dialin B Dune Dialing Specifies dialing settings including area code country code dial type and the code to disable call waiting You can store multiple patterns for exam ple Work Home and so on using this dialogue box Certificates 0 Certificates A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate The certificate assigned through this icon is used to ensure that the submitted public key is in fact the public key that belongs to the submitter The client checks that the cer tificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the clie
196. le cab also requires careful consider ation especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Psion Teklogix for assistance see Appendix A Support Services and Worldwide Offices at the end of this document Note also that for better protection the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage Use of the Powered Fork Lift Cradle while charging the fork truck battery is prohibited AN Important Safeguards e To avoid possible injury this device must be properly secured when in a moving vehicle e Keep this device away from magnetic fields e Do not place the computer near a television or radio receiver e Do not disassemble your 8525 computer there are no user serviceable parts inside Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 233 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 1 4 2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Mounting Kit PN 1008424 Cradle Mounting Plate and Quick Release Adaptor Plate Adaptor Plate Figure 7 1 Quick Release Mount Installed First the 8525 must be attached to the cradle Figure 7 2 on page 235 To do this e Place the terminal in the cradle so that the display side of the terminal is on the same side as the quick release fasteners The keyboard side of the termi nal should be on the same side as the tabs 234 Psion Teklo
197. le clicks and taps for Y Key clicks O Loud O Soft Rb Si Screen taps 0 Loud O Soft Remove 308 y yore 3 Programs ler Scanners Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel zo volume amp Sounds Pro i gt 5 21 Figure 5 17 Volume Settings e Slide the volume button upward to increase the beeper volume or down ward to decrease the beeper volume e Under the heading Enable sounds for enable V the conditions under which you want the 8525 to emit a beep 5 5 4 Power Management Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialogue box that indicates the unit s internal backup battery capacity and indicates the power source of the 8525 e In the Control Panel choose the Power icon File View x 2 A Oo L A 9 y gt Q ur 5 l gt Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display io IPv6 Keyboard Device Support TY A 5 1 e amp E 3 Mouse Narrow Bandi Network and Owner Password Power Regional i Rado Dial up Co Settings Y gt Doa Jo L Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume 8 amp Stat rx Control Pane uw will Ss 9 Figure 5 18 Choosing The Power Icon 80 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Suspend 5 5 4 Power Suspend fL Note A Battery tab is only available when the security level is set to Teklogix e In the Power Properties dialogue box open the Suspend tab Fi
198. le computer at a time This License does not allow the Software to exist on more than one computer at a time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only The backup copy must include all copyright information con tained on the original Except as expressly permitted in this License you may not in whole or part decompile reverse engineer disassemble modify rent lease loan sublicense distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software or trans mit the Software over a network You may not copy the Software onto any bulletin board or similar system You agree that you will not utilize any information obtained from MDC or obtained or learned in the course of using the Software to develop or improve technology with similar functionality to the Software nor will you directly or indirectly assist any other party in doing so You further agree that you will not separate the various modules of the software for their different purposes if any High Risk Activities The Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as on line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death personal injury
199. le view Power Properties Suspend Card Slots Bluetooth a Device On External Power 5 Switch state to Suspend Storage bd amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel 3 Power Properties 2501 m0 Figure 5 19 Power Suspend Properties Switch State To Suspend When the 8525 is idle not receiving any user input a key touch a scan and so on or system activity serial data an activity initiated by an application and so on the the value assigned in the witch State To Suspend field determines when the unit will go to suspend state appear to be off When the time in the Suspend field elapses without any activity the unit enters Suspend state In Suspend state the 8525 CPU enters a sleep state and the radio is shut off The state of the device RAM contents is preserved Pressing ENTER wakes the system from suspend state When the 8525 is in suspend state the network connection will not be broken immediately If the connection is dropped you must re establish the network connection Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 81 Chapter 5 Configuration Card Slots 5 542 Card Slots Eie View Mes Qj Semen card sts mu Slot Power Status v M 2 PCCard 1 Empty Slot Mouse SDIO SD Bluetooth A Storage Start TekTerm JE Control Panel s Power Properties Comino Figure 5 20 Activating Card Slots This tab is us
200. lected for inclusion in your profile you can view a list of the selected files databases and or registry View Selections File Name Application Data desktop ini 3 21 2003 04 00 00 My Documents desktop ini 3 21 2003 04 00 00 Program Files desktop ini 3 21 2003 04 00 00 Windows cezcliexe ama 04 52 54 lt Back Next gt PE Figure 5 62 Viewing Selections e Tap on the Next gt button to perform the operation Performing The Backup Perform the Operation To complete the Backup Restore tion the big button to the ht Al sss Backup To Flash Disk BACK FORWARD 3 SE amp jStart fTekTerm G Control Panel If Perform the Operation lt gt S EJ i 07 Figure 5 63 Performing The Backup e Tap on the Backup To Flash or Storage Card button to start the process and create a profile 5 7 2 Restoring A Profile To manually restore a profile e Choose Restore Selected Profile from the dropdown menu and select the Profile Name displayed in the drop down box EA Note You can also manually restore an auto restore profile located in flash or a storage device 112 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration IPv6 Support 5 8 IPv6 Support The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on your unit This internet protocol specification version 6 sup ports 128 bit IP addresses replacing version
201. led for the 8525 you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scanning proce dure or the bar code Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code Check that the bar code is within the proper range Does the vehicle mount display the warning without scanning This sug gests a hardware problem in the 8525 Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code Once the scan beam has stopped check the scanner window for dirt or fogging 3 1 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners Turn the 8525 on Wait until the unit has booted up completely A Important If an aiming dot is available on the scanner the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period including off after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time msec on page 116 for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners Aim at the bar code and press the trigger A scan beam and a warning indi cator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 39 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 3 8 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals Tethered peripherals such
202. lling The Dual Ball And Socket Mount Standard Cradle PN 1008441 Standard RAM Ball Ends Vesa Plate also available Figure 7 4 Dual Ball And Socket Mount With the standard RAM ball end or vesa plate s installed on the RAM mount e Attach the RAM mount to a standard cradle PN 1008441 using the hard ware included with your kit e Attach the other end of the mount to almost any surface The ball design allows both ends of the RAM mount to be angled to suit the operator s needs 1 4 4 Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the computer and other devices consider the following e Ensure the vehicle body and underlying wiring is not damaged while drill ing mounting holes e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal e Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 237 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles e Keep the cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards e Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle e Leave enough slack on the cables so that the computer can be removed easily for
203. lly parameters are configured for each site during installation e At the startup Display menu type a to display the Parameters menu 01 Parameters Range More Parameters see page 161 Security Supervisor see page 160 Display see page 160 e To open the More Parameters menu press F1 02 Parameters Radio System Scanner Ctrl Panel View Manager Applications Ports Network 6 16 Radio Parameters Important Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system The 8525 is equipped with an 802 11b radio Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 161 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Radio Parameters e Press F1 to display the Radio sub menu 03 Radio 802 11 e Press F1 to access the 802 11 sub menu 04 802 21 DS SS SS 802 19 1 N e Set 802 10 v to Y to activate these parameters and press F1 to display 802 IQ v1 parameters rz95 802 10 wl Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 3840 Initial RTT 0 0 1000 Protocol Type 2457 1501 65535 802 10 vl When 802 10 v1 is set to Y the attached sub menu of parameters is enabled Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is enabled s
204. lnet Settings 179 Media Copy 186 mnemonics 792 multiple sessions 175 Password Telnet Settings 179 Password Echo Telnet Settings 180 Password Prompt Telnet Settings 179 1 Index 2 Port 178 sessions closing 149 sessions establishing new 149 sessions listing 149 sessions moving between 149 settings 176 193 Telnet connection 177 Terminal 177 Terminal Type 178 transmitting data 7 9 121 186 Xmit Modes 184 188 802 IQ connection 177 ANSI Settings Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 177 Screen settings 181 AP Controller mac displaying 151 App parameter 797 appearance display colour scheme 69 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending to bar codes characters 5 119 121 Applications ANSI Settings 176 193 character attributes TESS 198 Character Sets TESS 198 Fields parameters TESS 206 Host Conn ANSI 177 Host Conn TESS 195 menu Applications 175 Scanner parameters TESS 205 Screen parameters ANSI 181 Screen parameters TESS 196 TESS Settings 194 209 Type and Title 176 approvals 8525 244 ar acknowledged remote number 1 52 arrow keys 147 completing a data field 139 207 cycling through special characters 157 Enh Mode using 208 moving the cursor 37 Arrow mode 788 Arrows 225 ASCII decimal equivalents of characters 200 Full Ascii 117 matching fields 199 Async In 792 attributes video 183 207 Audio 165 audio indicators description of beep conditions 37 Authentication
205. lour coded in blue and orange print above the keyboard keys Press the BLUE key to access functions or characters displayed in blue print on the keyboard Press the ORANGE key to access functions or characters displayed in orange print on the keyboard The lt SHIFT CAPS gt Key The lt SHIFT CAPS gt key is used to display uppercase alpha characters Pressing lt BLUE gt lt SHIFT gt turns the CAPS key on so that all alpha characters are printed in uppercase until the lt BLUE gt lt SHIFT gt sequence is pressed again Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keys The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear The lt INS gt Key The lt INS gt key inserts a character at the cursor position The lt DEL gt Key The lt DEL gt key erases the character at the cursor position The lt BKSP gt Key The lt BKSP gt key sometimes referred to as destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke The lt CTRL gt And lt ALT gt Key The lt CTRL gt and lt ALT gt keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent The lt TAB gt Key Typically the lt TAB gt key moves the
206. ly 240 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications 243 8 2 Radio Specifications s sae ee a ee ee ee ee 245 8 3 Bar Code Scanding e a 246 8 3 1 External Scanners 20 4806 8540 be bbe correos 246 8 4 External Scanner Specifications 0 0 246 8 4 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 246 8 4 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 248 8 5 Internal Lithium Ion Battery o o e 250 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 241 L Note 8 Size Weight Chapter 8 Specifications 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications 298mm W x 117mm H x 292mm L 11 W x 45 8 Hx 11 L 4 3 kg 9 5 Ibs Operating System Windows CE NET 4 2 Processor And Memory 400MHz ARM RISC 400 MIPS 32KB instruction 32KB data cache on board RAM 128mByte SDRAM on board ROM 64 MByte FLASH Internal power supply 10 90VDC designed for forklift power 12 6V Li Ion standard battery for brown out Advance Smart Battery Built in fast charger 1 week real time clock backup Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 243 Chapter 8 Specifications 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications Com
207. ly validated or that it has been rejected If the PIN has been validated an asterisk appears in the PIN column in the Devices list box indicating that this device has a PIN set Once a PIN is entered it is saved in the registry To remove the PIN e Tap on Set PIN and press ENTER If the 8525 attempts to connect to a remote device that has Authentication enabled and does not have a required PIN set an Authentication Request dialogue box appears e Enter the PIN and tap on OK to connect the devices 5 6 2 The Server Tab File vie Bluetooth Controls ices Servers Active Conn Properties Bluetooth Device Storage zy Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel Bluetooth Controls 5M i sor Figure 5 41 Bluetooth Servers Tab Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 101 Chapter 5 Configuration The Properties Tab The Bluetooth connection is initiated from your 8525 to the remote device therefore the 8525 is called the client and the remote is called the server The Servers tab displays the server profiles that can be activated in your 8525 There is currently one server profile available Serial e Tap on the checkbox to activate V the server and it will display the associated port name beside the server name Once you activate a server profile it is recommended that the 8525 be rebooted before you try to bond from a server S
208. m each other or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation Minimum 2 8mm distance or 0 4mm distance through insulation is required for the separation The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply The black lead connects to the negative supply this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body The 8525 is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 239 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch It 1s preferable to wire the 8525 after the key switch that is the 8525 cannot be switched on without turning the vehicle key on However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the 8525 before the switch Keep in mind that the 8525 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its back up battery has sufficient charge If an unfused power source must be used a fuse assembly PN 19440 must be added to the extension power cable the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly The fuse assembly must be located as close as practical to the DC supply and shall connect to the positive side of the DC supp
209. m in arm in arm in My MSN Hotmail Careers amp Jobs Giant octopus finds love 4 http fg msn com 0USIs5 31472_315529 HP 1001 http entertairn 4 Stat TekTerm amp 5 Network Connections as Figure 5 55 Accessing The Internet 108 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Total Recall 5 7 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is extended to incorporate power advanced features e Inthe Control Panel choose the Total Recall icon File View 2 x Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support ex 5 4 25 ET rrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional Radio Dial up Co Connection Settings eS o WW Remove Storage System Teklogix Y Total Recall olume amp y Start rr Control Panel S Ee we s 3 Figure 5 56 Total Recall Icon 5 Creating A Backup Profile Total Recall PsionTeklogix Press the forward backward buttons to view instructions on using PsionTeklogix Total Recall BACK FORWARD amp jStart TekTerm 2 Control Panel If Total Recall PsionT gt SRA i Sige Figure 5 57 Backup Profile In the dropdown menu you can choose from four options Create Backup Profile View Selected
210. maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is considered a double click The allowable range is 0 to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Click Data For both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your 8525 following a double click A dialogue box appears asking that you press the key you want to insert The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Options Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep The allowable values are 0 0 1 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 and 3 0 seconds A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Short Code When enabled set to ON this par
211. mpleted including the SSID of your access point and the security methods implemented in the network including access keys A Important Ifthe 8525 is equipped with a radio that has never been config ured the radio settings dialogue box opens automatically when the unit is powered on In this case skip to Step 4 on page 17 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 15 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 To configure the 802 11b radio 1 Tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar and tap on Set tings gt Network and Dial up Connections TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 61 Display Menu rs mE E NUNG NSNNNNNS XH i 007 S d i Figure 2 1 Network And Dial Up Connections AN Note You can also press CTRL lt ESC gt to display the Start Menu 2 Choose the radio icon to open the Wireless LAN Settings window in the Min screen below this is labelled PTAWLAG ov s Serial Cable USB Cable on COM2 AJE Start TekTerm amp Network Connections i 5 Figure 2 2 Wireless Settings Window 16 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 3 Wireless Statistics Tab When you choose the Wireless LAN icon a Wireless Statistics window is displayed File Edit View ADS eI sl de IP Information Wireless Statistics wireless Information i R
212. mpt Password Prompt When the 8525 receives this string it responds with a Password Password The computer responds with this string when it receives a Password Prompt Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 179 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Password Echo When this parameter is set to Y the host will echo data back to the terminal after receiving a Password Login Failed When the unit receives this string it assumes that the login attempt has failed and returns to the Enter Pmpt Func Key Remap In ANSI each function key has a default string associated with it When a function key is pressed the corresponding default string is sent to the host The Func Key Remap table allows these function key character sequences to be redefined 07 Func Key Remap F 1 1B 4F 50 00 00 00 00 F2 1B 4F 51 00 00 00 00 Fr 3 1B 4F 52 00 00 00 00 F28 1B 5B 34 32 TE 00 00 F29 1B 5B 34 33 TE 00 00 F30 1B 5B 34 34 To change values e Press the UP or lt DOWN gt arrow key to highlight a function key e Press the TAB key to move through the string of values e Either type new values or press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to change the values 180 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Arrow Key Remap In ANSI the arrow keys have a default string ass
213. munication Ports e One Tether port with one RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer undecoded scanner port USB host port One Port with DB9 plug RS232 e One Port with High density socket one RS222 serial comm port USB device port 2USB host ports Environmental Standard Temperature Unit Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity 3 axis Vibration 3 axis Shock Freezer Unit Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity 3 axis Vibration 3 axis Shock Approvals Safety EMC 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 35 C to 70 C 31 F to 158 F IEC 529 classification IP66 5 95 RH non condensing 1 5g RMS PSD 4 500 Hz 30g 11ms saw tooth 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F 35 C to 70 C 31 F to 158 F IEC 529 classification IP66 5 95 RH non condensing 1 5g RMS PSD 4 500 Hz 30g 11ms saw tooth UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No950 LVD EN60950 FCC Part 15 Class B EMC Directive Class B 244 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Radio Specifications 8 2 Radio Specifications 802 11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Compact Flash form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range Rx Sensitivity Data Rates 32 mW 2 400 2 4835 1 to 13 50 115m 93dBm 1Mbps 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps auto fallback 802 1 1g Direct Sequence Sprea
214. n ANSI Emulation on page 146 Auto Term AN Note Refer to Group on page 177 for additional instructions 176 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn When this parameter is set to Y a unique number is assigned for the current ANSI session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored L Note Auto Term is available when 802 10v2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter or when 802 1Qv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu see 802 IQ v1 on page 162 Group Auto Term Range Group 1 1 5 When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal For every application session you create the Terminal assigned must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525 Other applications running in the 8525 such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different number In addition each Psion Teklogix 8525 using the radio link must have a unique number 6 20 1 1 Host Conn Host Conn Range Conn Type Telnet 802 1Qv2 9010t Telnet Narrow Band Settings see text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depen
215. n 195 TESS Settings character attributes 798 character sets choosing 798 Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 195 Fields parameters 206 Scanner parameters 205 screen settings 196 Test 220 Tether amp Console Port character set 2 8 peripheral devices 2 7 scan see parameters 22 Tether Console Ports Baud 2 9 Buffer 220 Data Bits 2 9 Flow Control 2 9 Input Tmo 220 Output Tmo 220 Parity 2 9 Retries 220 Stop Bits 2 9 Test 220 tethered device connecting and disconnecting 39 timeouts beacon bt 152 tn host terminal number of session 152 Total Recall 708 backup profile creating 108 backup profile restoring 111 touch pen using 45 touchscreen recalibration 32 83 stylus using 45 touch pen using 45 Transfer Termination Mode TTM 187 transmissions waiting in queue TxQ 1 52 transmit LED 34 transmitted acknowledgements xa 151 transmitted initialized messages xi 151 transmitted messages xm 5 transmitting data 185 186 190 207 transmit on entry field 759 trigger double click 7 5 troubleshooting tips scanning 38 TIM 187 turning 8525 off 15 turning 8525 on 15 TxQ messages waiting to be sent 752 typ data stream type 52 Type 170 typing in upper case 200 U UCC 128 Code 128 720 underline ASCII decimal equivalent 200 video attribute 783 Unicode values entering 58 UPCA 122 UPCE 123 Upper ANSI Host Char Set 193 Upper Case 200 USB Setup Application C ins
216. n emulation as opposed to the controller The value assigned to this parameter informs the host of the terminal type the session is emulating ENTER Pmpt This string indicates that the 8525 is waiting for the user to press ENTER at the time of connection 178 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn ESC Prompt This string indicates that the user can press the lt ESC gt key to terminate a connection attempt before the connection is established Auto Login Auto Login Range Login Prompt gin see text Login see text Password Prompt word see text Password see text Password Echo Y Y N Login Failed incorrect see text The Auto Login parameters are used to define whether or not the 8525 will attempt to log in automatically The Auto Login sequence is as follows 1 Host sends Login Prompt 8525 responds with Login Host sends Password Prompt 8525 responds with Password Host may send password echo 8525 ignores password echo if Password Echo is set to Y otherwise skip to step 7 7 8525 looks for Login Failed in next transmission from host 8 Login successful or Login failed and return to step 1 QNA GR ITP Login Prompt When the unit receives the string assigned to this parameter it will respond with Login Login The unit responds with this string when it receives a Login Pro
217. n this mode LOCAL MI Select Host Figure 6 3 Local Menu 6 7 11 Selecting Another Host Computer e Press lt CTRL gt lt H gt or F9 from the local menu to display a menu of available hosts This menu appears only when more than one host is available Select Host Fl Host 1 F2 Host 2 Figure 6 4 Select Host Screen L Note This feature will not function when the Lcl Process and Queuing parameters are disabled see Lcl Process Save on Reset on page 201 and Queuing on page 201 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 145 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Queuing Mode 6 7 12 Queuing Mode In some applications queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time In queuing mode the host computer may send several pages to an 8525 without waiting for a response These pages are stored in a queue within the 8525 vehicle mount The operator completes the entries on the first page and then presses a function key The 8525 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in the queue The computer does not lock allowing the operator to enter data on the next page immediately This continues as long as there are pages in the queue Queuing mode is used for repetitive tasks and the queued screens look identical The 8525 displays a Next message indicating that a new page is on the display Next messages also contain information about radio communications
218. nder of this License shall continue in full force and effect Acknowledgement Your use of any software produced by MDC is based only on your acknowledge ment that you have read this License understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual VII License Agreement VIII MDC Acknowledgments This product includes software developed by MDC and its licensors This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Tool kit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay Ocryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Complete Agreement This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by MDC NOTE EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THESE WARRANTY TERMS DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICA BLE TO THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE TO YOU Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc 150 Greenleaf Avenue Unit F Portsmouth NH 03801 Revised 8 12 2002 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual APPROVALS ND SAFETY SUMMA
219. nds the 8525 radio stays in power down mode when a power down period has been initiated Power Off Time is only used when the Enable Power Saving parameter is enabled y The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 60 5 5 1 5 Radio Tab 204 x Info l Channel l Protocol Power Radio Mode UNLOCKED Modulation Baud Rate 2 Level 4800 Data Squelch Data Squelch 50 Test Squelch Frequency Statistics Advanced Figure 5 37 Radio Tab Modulation Baud Rate The options listed in the Modulation Baud Rate dropdown menu are 2 Level 4800 2 Level 9600 4 Level 9600 and 4 Level 19200 The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Base Station This parameter is stored in the radio s non volatile memory The default value for Modulation Baud Rate is 2 Leve1 9600 Data Squelch Data Squelch controls the radio receiver cutting 1t off when the signal is too weak for reception of anything but noise Receive Signal Strength Indicator values below the Data Squelch threshold prevent further processing of the receive signal while higher values allow further processing The allowable range is 0 to 100 with a default value of 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Radio Tab In noisy environments this value can be increased to reject noise In environments with less noise this value c
220. ne as it might appear at the bottom of your screen jock B Lock H fld enh application name lt CTRL gt lt T gt Displays the 8525 status with the terminal number instead of the name joCk B Lock H rep terminal nn lt CTRL gt lt H gt Displays a menu of available hosts 6 7 9 Resetting A TESS Session Resetting a TESS session requires that lt CTRL gt C be pressed three times within a two second period to generate the RESET User request message Press and hold down the lt CTRL gt key and press the lt C gt key three times within a two second period Press lt ENTER gt This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the 8525 144 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Local Menu 6 7 10 The Local Menu The host can store local procedures in the 8525 for use when the unit is off line A menu of these procedures appears whenever lt CTRL gt L is pressed see Figure 6 3 e Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform Local procedures will not function when the Lecl Process and Queuing parameters are disabled see Lcl Process Save on Reset on page 201 and Queuing on page 201 Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on line 8325 1t allows work to continue when the host is unavailable The LOCK B H messages are replaced with NEXT B H i
221. ner and the lower right corner of the command region Currently the only commands supported in the command region are ALARM and FONT Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 211 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation 3274 Telnet Emulation r 05 Emulation Range Fujitsu Host N Y N Intl EBCDIC N Y N Nulls in Fields N Y N IP for SysReq N Y N BRK for Attn N Y N LU Name Enabled N Y N LU Name see text Features see text FKEYO 7 see text FKEY8 15 see text FKEY16 23 see text FKEY24 31 see text FKEY32 39 see text Fujitsu Host If this parameter is set to Y data is sent in Fujitsu format Enabling Fujitsu Host causes the standard IBM formatting codes for start of field setting buffers etc to be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled set to Y the international EBCDIC character set is used swapping the positions of the and characters Nulls in Fields Setting this parameter to Y allows null characters e g hyphens or periods to fill in empty entry fields gt IP for SysReq When the system request key is pressed a Telnet Interrupt Process command is generated The Interrupt Process command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the system request key press to a host using
222. nning Techniques L Note External scanners can only be connected to the 8525 tether port Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code In this position light can reflect back into the scanner s exit window and prevent a successful decode Scan the entire bar code Make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code including the margins on either end of the symbol Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together 3 7 2 Scan LED Indicators The 8525 scanner LED the upper right LED indicates whether or not your scan is successful The LED behaves as follows Scan In Progress scan LED displays solid red colour Successful Scan scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended Unsuccessful scan scan LED flashes red A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan While the scanner beam is active the onscreen message states SCANNING If the scan is successful the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan trigger is released 38 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Troubleshooting 3 1 3 Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following Is the 8525 on Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enab
223. nt explicitly trusts Certificate Assignment on page 84 directs you to the appropriate setup information aa PC Connection PC Connection Enables direct connections to a desktop computer Selecting the Change Con nection button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC vw Teklogix Scanners Teklogix Scanners Used to set up scanner parameters and choose the bar code symbologies that the 8525 scanner will successfully read 66 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons a Network And Dial up Connections Network and Displays a network window from which the 8525 radio can be configured ts and an existing configuration can be executed Refer to Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 on page 15 for details Y Internet Options Internet Options Used to configure your Internet browser including options such as identify ing the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet setting the cache size specifying the Internet connection options and defining the security level that is applied when browsing E SNMP SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is the protocol used to monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP IP network This feature is reserved for future use Q Bluetooth Bluetooth aoi sedal A short range wireless technology that enables data communi
224. ntensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the BLUE and ORANGE keys a Bluetooth Device Ar o Mouse e Storage start Tekrem Control Panel Bars PAI Figure 6 7 Keyboard Properties Eile view OEA Properties ok ES Tap here and hold down a key to test Important Refer to Keyboard Properties on page 70 for details about this dialogue box 6 17 2 Audio r 04 Audio Range Beep Tone 3000 800 3000 Beep Time 250 0 2000 Error Tone 1000 800 3000 Error Time 1000 0 2000 Scan Tone 1 1500 800 3000 Scan Time 1 100 0 2000 Scan Tone 2 2000 800 3000 Scan Time 2 100 0 2000 Scan Tone 3 2500 800 3000 Scan Time 3 100 0 2000 Sounds Ctrl Panel see text Figure 6 8 Audio Menu Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 165 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Audio Beep Tone And Beep Time These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or ANSI session when one of the following is received at the 8525 an advisory a hey you or a bell character Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Error Tone And Error Time These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Scan Tone And Scan Time Scan tone 1 and Scan time 1 determine the frequency and duration of the first beep of a multipl
225. ntify the 8525 over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each unit L Note This parameter is set to O an out of range value by default to block radio communication when the unit is initially powered up This prevents several new terminals from attempting to communicate with the same default terminal number at initial power up Once the default value is changed it cannot be set back to 0 Polling The default values for the Polling parameters are dependent on the value assigned to the Modulation Baud Rate parameter in the Radio tab Modulation Baud Rate Sync Delay Window Delay Poll Timeout 4 Level 19200 17 20 20 4 Level 9600 17 23 25 2 Level 9600 17 19 22 2 Level 4800 25 23 37 Table 5 3 Polling Parameters Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 93 Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab e Sync Delay Warning This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing The ync Delay parameter specifies the delay between the base station transmission and the first response window measured in milliseconds The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system The allowable range for this parameter is between 1 and 40 Window Delay AN Important The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the f
226. ntry Field allows the operator to enter data This type of field is usually shown 173 ASE Tassen Match Field the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry If the entered data does not match the expected format the unit emits a long beep Auto tab Field automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled Bar code only Field is filled with data from a bar code reader Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field Serial VO Field is filled with data coming from a serial port Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of field 138 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 6 7 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal L Note These keys are active at all times in TESS applications Key Sequence Cursor Movement Cursor moves to the first position in the next lt PgDn gt key input field If already in the last field the cursor moves to the first input field on the screen Cursor moves to the beginning of the current lt PgUp gt key field If already in the first position the cursor moves to beginning of the previous field Current field is cleared from the cursor position lt End gt key to the end of the field and the cursor moves to the next input field
227. nual Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 13 Settings Standard Enable set to ON Standard if Code 128 is desired UCC 128 UCC is a variation of Code 128 EAN UCC 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code EAN UCC must be enabled set to ON EAN UCC bar codes include group separators and start codes Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 119 for details 5 9 2 3 EAN 13 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 or off to disable it Include Country If this parameter is enabled set to ON the country code is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code This parameter provides three options Disabled Optional and Required Depending on the value chosen for this parameter an addendum is recognized or ignored When Addendum is setto Disabled the scanner does not recognize an addendum If this parameter is setto Optional the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists appends it to the main bar code When the parameter is setto Required the scanner does not accept the ma
228. number Support Services Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom ers In North America these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix Helpdesk The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training helps you to troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site For contact information and a listing of worldwide offices please refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date Teklogix Inc reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be held responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presented in this manual Program License Agreements oooooooccoccoco Approvals And Safety Summary llis esee Chapter Introduction 1 1 About This Manual oe 12 TextConventions 1 3 About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 1 3 1 Features cos 6 29 ox o Rn ge R Roe UR RR Y RUE 1 3 2 The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 1 33 8525 POrtS iem dk ke des Rok OR OR E E ew eS 1 3 4 Regulatory Labels lees Chapter 2 Basic Checkout 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Preparing The 8525 For Operation 0 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 2 2 1 Switching The 852500 o o o o
229. o None One Check Digits Or Two Check Digits If this parameter set to One Check Digits itis assumed that the last digit is a check digit If this parameter is set to Two Check Digits it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 92 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 or off to disable it Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 125 Chapter 5 Configuration MSI Plessey Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 12 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey or off to disable it One Check Digit If this parameter is enabled set to ON it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 92 13 Discrete 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the
230. o Range Bold NONE see text Blink BLNK see text Reverse REV see text Underline ULIN see text The possible attributes for these parameters are BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse and NONE normal Bold This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold ANSI attribute Blink This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink ANSI attribute Reverse This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse ANSI attribute Underline This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Underline ANSI attribute Label FI FIO fL Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 156 06 Label F1 10 F1 F10 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 183 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the Label F1 F10 parameter
231. o ooo oo 2 2 2 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 2 2 3 Assigning An IP Address o o o o oo 2 24 Name Servers Lab 4s ii a o Bow 2 2 5 Advanced Features o e e eaaa Calibrating The Touchscreen o o o Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount ond 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 gt 3 3 3 4 Features Of The 8525 se sex ek be we ee Rx E E OY eS The Internal Backup Battery lll Switching The 8525 Vehicle Mount On And Off The Keyboard 155295 ds Red O Pad es Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 2 Contents 35 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 341 Moditier Keys 2 444 2 2s aw ele RR GL oe ew dos 29 3 442 THE Keys 5 x ox be eh ede a bk gk a Be 30 3 4 3 The Keypad Backlight o 32 The Display sce see seiate e xXx Yr 32 3 5 1 Calibrating The Touchscreen o o 32 8525 Indicators se 5 ee ooo m RR RR ERU 33 3 0 1 DEDS s ouem Ro Res re RUP sce beet e ogg 33 3 62 Onscreen Indicators 2 2 000 eee ee ee 35 3 6 3 Audio Indicators s e s 2 o o eee 37 SCANNING ei ae SG es ee od ae a oe A 37 3 7 1 Scanning Techniques ooo oo o 37 3 7 2 Scan LED Indicators s ati 4 4 sree Gee a ad e 37 3 73 Troubleshooting 0 000000 02 eee 38 3 7 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 38
232. ociated with them to move the cursor in the direction of the arrow The Arrow Key Remap table allows the arrow key character sequences to be redefined r 07 Arrow Key Remap Up Arrow 1B 5B 41 00 00 Down Arrow 1B 5B 42 00 00 Right Arrow B 5B 43 00 00 Left Arrow B 5B 44 00 00 To change arrow key values e Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to highlight an arrow key e Press the TAB key to move through the string of values e Either type new values or press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to change the values 6 20 1 2 Screen rF 05 Screen W Rangen of Pages 4 0 16 of Rows 24 4 60 of Cols 80 80 or 132 Default Font 16x30 see text 80 col Font 16x30 see text 132 col Font 16x30 see text Video see text Label F1 F10 see text Colour override N see text of Pages This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs The ANSI control functions Next Page NP and Previous page PP are used to select another page These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text scroll off a page the other pages are unaffected There is no error indication from the vehicle mount computer if the memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the computer Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 181 Chap
233. ode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field In fcursor mode the UP DOWN LEFT and lt RIGHT gt arrow keys move the cursor between fields Insert mode Press lt CTRL gt i to enter insert mode In this mode data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered In insert mode the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field The UP and DOWN arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field Replace mode L Note When the Press lt CTRL gt r to enter replace mode In this mode data can be entered over previously entered characters In replace mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previ ous or next field Enter on Arr parameter is disabled set to N the UP and DOWN arrow keys do not complete an entry field Refer to page 207 for details about this parameter 140 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application lt DEL gt Key Behaviour In TESS 6 1 5 2 DEL Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode In a left justified field the lt DEL gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in th
234. of the screen Panning relies on the values set in the Use Increment X Increment and Y Increment parameters to determine the number of columns spaces and rows lines the screen contents shift e In the More Parameters menu position the cursor on View Manager and press lt F1 gt e First enable the Use Increment parameter set it to Y X Increment determines the number of columns spaces the screen pans when the lt BLUE gt key is locked on and the lt LEFT gt or lt RIGHT gt arrow key is pressed Y Increment determines the number of rows lines the screen pans when the UP or DOWN arrow key is pressed when the BLUE key is locked on e Assign a value to the X Increment and Y Increment parameters Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 135 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Task Manager Switching Between Applications To pan the screen contents e Press the BLUE key twice to lock it on It will be displayed in upper case letters BLUE in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen Press the RIGHT LEFT UP or lt DOWN gt arrow key AN Note Pressing the LEFT arrow pans the screen to the right pressing the RIGHT arrow pans the screen to the left and so on Once you re done e Press the BLUE key a third time to unlock or turn it off 6 5 The Task Manager Switching Between Ap
235. on The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station Using Shared authentication each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802 11 wireless network communications channel WPA Wi Fi Protected Access uses the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP to provide strong data encryption and offers two user authentica tion and key management methods The first method of user authentication is intended for environments using a centralized Authentication Server such as RADIUS User authentication is based on IEEE 802 1X and mutual authentication based EAP In environments where a centralized Authentication Server or EAP frame work is not available user authentication is based on a Pre Shared Key method WPA PSK If you are using Pre Shared Key authentication you will need to manually enter a password Master Key in the Access Point or Wireless Router and enter the same password in each client device that accesses the wireless network The manually configured WPA password Master Key automatically starts the TKIP data encryption process Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 20 File Edit View NUIT att LOK x Disable this option to Network key Key index fi access Network Ke
236. ons 217 6 21 2 Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 218 6 21 3 Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters 221 NetWork ita tied she sa eet ws oh ok eee eee 226 6 22 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings 226 022 2 002 1012 ii ia e NE ae as 227 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 External Bar Code Readers o e 231 7 1 1 PowerScan M Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 231 7 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader 231 Bluetooth Peripherals ee 231 GPS Unit 42 22x weet he ae AAA AA 232 Mounting Accessories gt s ese 22s 232 7 4 1 8525 Mounting Recommendations 233 7 4 2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 234 7 4 3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount 237 7 44 Wiring Guidelines secs 5 6464 bee om a 237 7 4 5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles 238 7 4 6 8525 Installation In Vehicles 230 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Contents 7 4 7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 239 Chapter 8 Specifications 8 1 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications 243 8 2 RadioSpecifications ss smo se 000000 245 8 3 BarCodeScanning s e sea aga ae eae ea a a e p e A 246 8 3 1 External Scanners 2 2 ee cce e a 246 8 4 External Scanner Specifications
237. or your 8525 6 14 Display Options The Display sub menu is used to adjust your unit s display properties e Press F1 to access the Display sub menu 02 Display Range Backlight Ctrl Panel see text The Display Properties dialogue box is displayed where you can adjust the appearance backlight and contrast of your 8525 display A N Important The Display Properties dialogue box options are described in detail beginning on page 68 File View Display Properties Background Appearance a Bluetooth Mtansity n Device i fe minutes y Mouse When using external power keep the backlight always ON o Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogix Total Recall Volume 8 amp Start TekTerm 3 Control Panel A Display Properties i8 EE Figure 6 5 Display Properties 160 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application More Parameters 6 15 More Parameters The More Parameters sub menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be accessed with the proper security password either a Supervisory or a Teklogix password Refer to Security Settings on page 160 for details Warning Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties Genera
238. or severe physical or environmental damage High Risk Activities Accordingly MDC and its suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities You agree that MDC and its suppliers will not be liable for any claims or damages arising from the use of the Software in such applications Ownership The Software is licensed not sold The Software is owned and copyrighted by MDC or its third party suppliers Your license confers no title or ownership in the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software You acknowledge such ownership and intellectual property rights and will not take any action to jeopardize limit or inter fere in any manner with MDC s or its suppliers ownership of or rights with respect Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement to the Software The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual prop erty laws and by international treaties MDC s third party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms Termination Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from MDC if you fail to comply with any term s of this License Upon termination you must immediately destroy the Software together with all copies adaptations and merged portions in any form U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and documentation have been developed entirely
239. ous as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 33 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 PWR CHG Charge LED mE PSION TEKLOGIX Windows CE naot LIE DD Np oooooooooooO0 o ooooooooooo rooOQo e PA ILE IY TTA Figure 3 5 Keyboard LEDs 3 6 1 1 PWR CHG Charge LED The lower right LED is reserved for internal charger power status This LED turns solid green when the unit is receiving AC power A blinking green LED indicates that the unit is taking power from the backup battery 3 6 3 RX TX Radio Traffic LED The upper left LED on your 8525 flashes either orange or green to indicate when the radio transmits and receives data AN Note Keep in mind that while the standard 802 1 1b radio supports the trans mit receive LED not all radios support this function 34 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Scan LED Function Radio Traffic LED Behaviour Radio Transmit LED flashes orange Radio Receive LED flashes green Table 3 1 Transmit and Receive LEDs 3 6 1 3 can LED Successful scans are indicated in two ways with a scan LED and with an audio tone Function can LED Behaviour Scan in progress LED displays solid red during scan LED displays solid green after decode Off when scan ended Unsuccessful sc
240. oving characters 779 121 Rjct if Alpha 206 safety instructions 37 Scan Bad 174 Scan Good 7 74 Scan Indicator 114 Scan Log File 4 Scan Result 774 Scan Result Time 7 74 Scan See 217 Security 716 Short Code 1 5 suffix character 119 121 symbologies 116 target aiming dot duration 115 TESS Scanner parameters 205 Verify 116 Scan Result 774 Scan Result Time 4 Scan See keyboard mapping 226 parameters setting 22 226 port settings 2 7 serial number 225 viewport mapping 22 Scan Tone and Scan Time 166 screen stylus using to navigate 45 Index touch pen using 45 Windows CE navigating 45 Screen parameters ANSI 181 TESS 196 screens of Cols ANSI 182 of Cols TESS 196 of Rows ANSI 82 of Rows TESS 196 Anchor View 1 93 209 Display Shift 769 Field Scroll 796 moving between fields 188 206 Origin Scroll 196 page size shape 182 196 positioning 196 splitting view of 170 Type and View IDs Split screen 170 Use Increment 7 69 x and y origin 193 209 X Increment 7 69 Y Increment 769 Screen Switch 167 scrolling Field Scroll 796 Origin Scroll 196 Security 6 security level icon 36 Security Settings 57 changing password 32 configuring taskbar 53 level 51 Supervisor 51 Teklogix 57 User 51 security settings 160 default mode 167 Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM 187 select host CTRL h 144 selecting a host 145 Send Mile 202 Send with FKEY 209 serial I O TESS command 203 serial I O fields 1
241. parameter e For each application you want to display type the letter corresponding to the application For example suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and a TESS session in the right pane In the Display Menu the letter A represents Parameters and B represents TESS The Type and View ID values would be represented as follows 042 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs AB e Press ENTER To display the split screen on the 8525 Press lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt arrow 6 19 1 2 Moving Between Split Screens To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next e Press lt CTRL gt RIGHT or LEFT The cursor moves in order from the left most pane to the right and from the top most pane to the bottom 6 19 1 3 Toggling Between Full amp Split Screens To toggle between a split and full screen format Press lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt arrow The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen format is determined by the cursor location in the split screen For example if the cursor is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed and CTRL DOWN is pressed to display a full screen the TESS application will be displayed in the full screen Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 171 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Using The Aster
242. pen for data entry and the cursor is placed in the first field if it exists Ign Bcode fld When this parameter is enabled set to Y fields that were defined as bar code only accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader In effect they behave as data entry fields Enh Edit Mode This mode provides extended enhanced functions to users of Psion Teklogix IBM 5250 terminal emulation When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen unrestricted by fixed or entry fields Certain 5250 emulation keys e g Field Exit that were originally available only when Enh Edit Mode was set to Y are now active at all times in TESS applications Refer to IBM 5250 Emulation Keys on page 139 for details about these keys Valid Numerics This parameter is used to configure valid characters for numeric fields to a maximum of 39 characters Since this field is numeric numbers 0 through 9 do not need to be configured The default values for this parameter are 96 208 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Anchor View 6 20 2 8 Anchor View r 05 Anchor Range x origin y origin When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The x origin and
243. play panning is used if the page is longer than the display EL Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Origin Scroll When enabled set to Y the display window moves to the origin upper left corner after LOCK H or LOCK B messages Field Scroll When enabled set to Y the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry field 196 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Pages Saved This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the 8525 Storing frequently used page data at the 8525 reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions App Parameter The Application parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command Enter zero to disable this parameter Label FI FIO EL Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 156 06 Label F1 F10 F1 F10 Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at th
244. play the Wireless Statistics dialogue box L Note Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session At times you may need to renew your connection by logging in again 3 10 Connecting An 8525 To A PC To pass information between an 8525 and a PC or laptop you ll need to connect them using an Auxiliary Port Cable PN CA2200 This cable is equipped with two USB Host I F connections for devices such as a mouse or keyboard and one USB Device I F connection to for example connect a PC or laptop computer to the 8525 USB Auxiliary Connector Connector 3 i Figure 3 8 Auxiliary Port Cable e Attach the auxiliary connector to the auxiliary port on the 8525 the port closest to the vehicle mount power cable e Attach the USB connector to your PC or laptop Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files 3 10 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files Before communication can begin between an 8525 and a PC ActiveSync Microsoft PC connectivity software must be installed on your PC Once the devices are cabled together running ActiveSync on the PC will allow you to e View 8525 files from Windows Explorer e Drag and drop files between the 8525 and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives e Back up 8525 files to the PC then restore them from the
245. plications To display the Task Manager screen e Tapon Task Manager in the Start Menu Task Manager Ctrl Panel Active Tasks PTXWLAGS46B1 End Task Cancel L1tri Ajstat TekTerm PTXWLAGS46B1 is Figure 6 1 Task Manager Screen Supervisor L Note A shortcut to bypass the Start Menu and go directly to the Task Manager screen press ALT lt ESC gt To switch between applications e Highlight the application with which you want to work e Tap on the Switch To button To end or close an application e Highlight the application you want to end and tap on the End Task button 136 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Status Area 6 6 The Tekterm Status Area Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels The status area indi cates the operating condition of the vehicle mount 84 Keyboard Macro Ctrl Panel W Indicators Y Softkeys Y Ctrl Panel Supervisor noe wore Figure 6 2 Status Area In the sample screen above the security level assigned within the Tekterm application is displayed in the status area One of the following levels can be displayed Supervisor or Teklogix 6 1 TESS Emulation TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix computers Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Psion Teklogix Softwa
246. plus sign to display the sub menu e To change a parameter value double tap on the parameter or press the lt SPACE gt key 5 9 2 1 Code 39 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 39 or off to disable it Full Ascii If this parameter is enabled set to ON the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data 118 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Settings AIAG Strip If this parameter is enabled set to ON the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code EL Note If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application this parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature This is because the 8525 vehicle mount performs the strip function before it processes the data through the AIAG feature if the prefix is stripped the data is not identifi
247. preceding the field with a special character If this character precedes a fixed field the data will be sent to the 8525 s serial port If it precedes an entry field the field accepts data from the 8525 s serial port This parameter allows you to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of this special character A value of 0 zero disables this feature Fixed Field Ovrhd This parameter defines the maximum number of characters allowed within two adjacent fixed fields that can be sent as a single field For example if two fields are 4 characters apart and this parameter is set to 5 these fields are joined into a single field of data The allowable range for this field is O to 80 This feature affects fields with the Normal display attribute only Enable Alarm If this parameter is set to Y the 8525 emits a beep when the word ALARM appears on the application screen in the location specified by the Command Region parameter Command Region Up amp Down And Command Region Left amp Right The value assigned to the Command Region Up and Command Region Down parameters represent rows on the 8525 screen The allowable values range from 0 to 24 The value assigned to Command Region Left and Command Region Right parameters represent columns on the 8525 screen The allowable values range from 0 to 80 These four numbers represent the row and column addresses of the upper left cor
248. predefined displacement the offset is added to the location of the 8525 cursor to create a point the pivot This pivot is mapped to the anchor and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan See For example the anchor is chosen as 9 0 whereas 9 is the column and 0 is the line on the Scan See display e the offset is chosen as 4 2 e the cursor on the 8525 is currently located at 7 5 e the pivot would thus be located at 7 4 5 2 or 11 7 e and so the area displayed on the Scan See will be 11 9 7 0 to 11 9 9 7 0 1 or 2 7 to 11 8 These computations assume that Wraparound described on page 224 is disabled set to N and that Follow Cursor described on page 224 is enabled set to Y 222 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 I5 16 17 18 19 2021 ET terminal cursor 4 7 5 Y NW 4 6 3 da CORE PN 2 anchor 7 E U aimara 9 de ton pivot marr et Scan See Display Terminal Display superimposing the anchor on the pivot 0 1 234 5 6 7 8 9 IO II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192021
249. puter User Manual 3 Index 4 Click Data scanner double click 715 Click Time scanner double click 115 CLR DEL key Local Echo mode ANSI 89 CLR Key 226 Codabar 123 Code 11 724 Code 128 119 Code 39 117 118 Code 93 123 Cold Reset Shutdown menu 38 Colour Override 784 198 Column Offset 222 columns number of in ANSI screen 782 number of in TESS screen 196 COM Bluetooth Controls 702 Command Prompt 33 Command Region Up Down Left amp Right 2 configuring IEEE 802 11 radio 5 configuring softkey labels Label F1 F10 197 configuring softkey labels Label F1 F5 183 connecting Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 connection host 177 195 connection list table Bluetooth Controls 102 Conn Type connection type 177 195 Cont Nxt Fld 205 control codes 192 control panel accessing 63 basic setup 68 Display Properties 68 icons 64 keyboard properties 70 power management properties 80 stylus properties 82 Convert to UPC A 123 country code 120 CR LF CTRLJ 189 LF character 190 Newline 190 CRC serial VO 204 205 CTRL commands CTRLa 149 CTRLc 144 CTRLf 140 CTRL G Bell 189 CTRLh 145 CTRL H Backspace 189 CTRL h
250. r displays the application s currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to your 8525 The taskbar also displays active modifier keys lt SHIFT gt ALT lt CTRL gt BLUE and ORANGE Keys that have been locked on are displayed in uppercase letters For example if you press the lt CTRL gt key twice to lock it on it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar 4 3 2 1 Using The Taskbar e Using the stylus tap on the indicator you want to view the radio icon for example to display a dialogue box outlining radio communication information 4 3 2 2 Customizing The Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require e From the Start Menu tap on the Settings option and then on the Taskbar and Start Menu option The Taskbar and Start Menu dialogue box is displayed TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec E184c 81 Display Men E Parameters Taskbar and Start Menu Properties General Advanced E M Show active app Auto hide Y Show Start button J Show Clock Teklogix Select ld TTC A O Start TekTerm Taskbar and Start Menu i Ad Figure 4 4 Taskbar And Start Menu Settings e Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate A check mark indicates active items L Note The Advanced tab allows you to tap on a Clear button to delete the contents of the Documents folder Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User M
251. r modifications not expressly approved by Psion X Teklogix Inc could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Approvals And Safety Summary e RF EXPOSURE Warning To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for vehicle mount transmitting devices a separation distance of 20 cms should be maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during device operation To ensure compliance operations at closer than this distance is not recommended Do Nor Remove Covers On OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel Do not operate the equipment without the covers and enclosures properly installed AN Caution Use of the Vehicle Mount Computer while charging the fork truck battery is prohibited A CAUTION Use of additional wiring and attachments not recommended or sold by the manufacturer may result in fire electric shock or personal injury N Gur If using an AC adaptor use only the AC adaptor recommended by manufacturer A CAUTION Do not operate the vehicle mount computer with a damaged cord or plug Replace immediately A CAUTION Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual XI Approvals And Safety Summary AY CAUTION An extension cord sho
252. r necessary Refer to Custom Charac ters Unicode on page 172 for details 6 11 3 Saving Changes To Parameters Whenever a parameter value is altered the new value must be saved To do this e Press F4 the SAVE key or Tap the stylus on the SAVE softkey label EL Note Ifthe softkey labels are not visible you ll have to press F4 the SAVE function key If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved a dialogue box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes 158 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Retrieving Default Parameter Values 6 11 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values AN Important When lt F3 gt the DEFAULT key is pressed all parameter values revert to the factory defaults including those values that you ve changed and saved e Press F3 the DEFAULT function key or tap the stylus on the DEFAULT softkey label to reinstate the default parameter values e Press F4 the SAVE function key or tap the stylus on the SAVE softkey label to save the changes Reset the 8525 See Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer in the next section 6 12 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Some parameter adjustments require that the 8525 be reset before the changes can take effect To reset the 8525 e Press and hold down the
253. r the unit is reset Remap Passthru When this parameter is set to Y passthru data is remapped from the host charset to the port charset Normally passthru data is sent as is to the port without any remapping Disable Beep Setting this parameter to y disables the beep generated by the o G and TESS commands Keep in mind that Error and Scan beeps are not disabled 202 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features Serial r 06 Serial Range Serial Port Any Available see text Serial Out Y Y N Serial In N Y N SI mode see text SI prefix 1 03 255 SI suffix 1 02255 SI CRC N Y N SI Fkey 0 Deza SO prefix al 042 255 SO suffix 1 0 255 SO CRC N Y N Serial Port TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer ports on the 8525 At the 8525 computer the value assigned at the Serial Port parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the first to fourth port The allowable options are Any Available 1st Serial 2nd Serial 3rd Serial 4th Serial and Disabled Serial Out This parameter enables serial port output fields Serial In This parameter enables the serial port input fields If enabled set to Y the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port Acceptance of data in a SI field is determined by the SI prefix and
254. ra wires in the Unit input Power cable 22 AUXILIARY ID External device Identity Input Pin 23 NO CONNECT 24 PCON PROGRAM Input used to program Peripheral Controller Internal use only 25 NO CONNECT 26 NO CONNECT Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual B 3 APPENDIX c USB SETUP APPLICATION C 1 USB Setup The USB Setup application PN 1000997 is used to update a Windows PC so that it can connect to a Psion Teklogix 8525 System Requirements e Windows 2000 or XP e ActiveSync 3 1 or later The two driver classes that control USB communication are usbstor for commu nication with a device running BooSt and wceusbsh for communication through ActiveSync with a device running Windows CE NET These drivers must be updated with 8525 specific information so that the 8525 can be recognized by your PC The install program e updates copies of the device installation scripts usbstor inf and wceusbsh inf with Psion Teklogix specific information e sets up a USB connection between the PC and the 8525 and e installs the 8525 as a device on your PC This may require notifying the PC OS that the device should be reinstalled and then reconnecting the USB device C 1 1 Launching The Application The log file is initialized and the program introduction is written to it Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 1 Appendix C USB Setup Application
255. ration can be selected from the startup Display Menu 146 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Sending Data To The Host 6 8 Sending Data To The Host 8525 vehicle mounts running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed The 8525 provides parameters that determine when the computer transmits characters to the host The 8525 can be configured to transmit after a number of characters are typed in the Xmit Count parameter or after some time has elapsed the Xmit Wait parameter or both This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response time See page 185 for more information about these parameters You can also determine whether the 8525 transmits immediately after the ENTER key an arrow key or a function key is pressed The 8525 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests CSIc CSIOC and ESCZ L Note For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI refer to ANSI Settings on page 176 6 8 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals Table 6 2 maps the equivalent VT220 keys Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key UP arrow Up arrow DOWN arrow Down arrow RIGHT arrow Right arrow LEFT arrow Left arrow lt F1 gt lt F4 gt PF1 PF4
256. re Development Kit SDK and installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands The 9150 Access Point is also equipped with protocol emulation software AN Note If the message RESET Press Enter flashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the 8525 press the lt ENTER gt key once Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 137 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Configuration 6 7 1 Configuration L Note Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it The title you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled Applications on page 175 A unique number must be assigned in the Terminal parameter for each TESS session Refer to Terminal in the section titled TESS Settings on page 194 for details 6 1 2 Working With Multiple Sessions To display another session in TESS e Go to the startup Display Menu If you are in a TESS session press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt to go to the Display Menu e Type the letter corresponding to the application you want to launch For example suppose the sessions are listed in the Display Menu as D TESS1 and E TESS2 To launch the session named TESS2 type the letter e 6 1 3 The Field Types Fixed Field displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard E
257. reen will be printed using the port configured as Print 6 8 5 5 Smart Echo Disabling In some circumstances like entering a password you many want to temporarily disable smart echo disguising the characters you type with periods e Press CTRL ALT lt P gt and type a period e Type the necessary information using the keyboard and then press lt ENTER gt to return to smart echo mode 6 9 The Radio Statistics Screen To access the radios statistics screen you ll need to use the Applications menu to assign a radio title e Inthe More Parameters menu choose Applications e Inthe Type field choose RadioStats e Inthe Title field type a name for the radio screen e g Radio e Press F4 to save your changes and then reset the 8525 press and hold down the BLUE and ENTER keys for a minimum of 6 seconds e Inthe Display menu type the letter corresponding to the radio statistics screen For example in the sample screen below you d type d to display the radio statistics screen 01 Display Menu A Parameters B TESS C ANSI D Radio 150 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 6 9 1 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 10 Stats Screen 802 10 Stats AP Controller MAC 00 00 00 00 Terminal MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 bootnum C33B rm 12 xm 7 rb 50 xi 1 ra 7 xa 12 bt O xr 1 rt av
258. rmines whether or not Tekterm is automatically launched when the 8525 is reset If this parameter is set to N Tekterm will not be launched when the terminal resets 6 18 Scanner Control Panel This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialogue box in which you can set up the particulars of your unit s scanner performance choose the bar codes which will be decoded and so on File View Scanner Properties LOK x X Q O ml mesos m6 s 2 Certificates Date Tinl IPv6 Keyboard Double Click Support wv e2 i Options d i 2 Mouse Network and Owner Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs BO y Storage Stylus Systerr Start Control Panel Figure 6 11 Scanner Properties Dialogue Box N Important Refer to Scanner Properties Setup beginning on page 114 for details about setting up your scanner 168 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application View Manager 6 19 View Manager View Manager Range Display Shift Y Y N Block Cursor Y Y N Use Increment N Y N X increment 5 40 Y increment 5 12 Split Screen see text Custom Chars see text Font Override N see text Default Colours see text Display Shift If this parameter is enabled set to Y the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left most side of the display Block Cur
259. rowse USB connection to Windows CE wceusbsh inf Needed for connecting to a terminal via ActiveSync Path GEN ficrosoft ActiveSync drivers wceusbsh inf Browsen USB mass storage usbstor inf Needed for connecting to a terminal running BooSt so thatthe Removable Disk is mapped in Windows Explorer Path C WINNT inf usbstor inf Browse Back Next gt Cancel C 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual L Note Appendix C USB Setup Application Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf If necessary tap on the Browse buttons to select different paths for the inf files Device Driver Install Selection Dialogue Box You can choose to have the device drivers installed immediately by selecting the check box V or you can leave the check box blank and Windows will install the 8525 the next time it is connected It is recom mended that the device be installed immediately im Psion 1eklogx USU setup x E ie Thes program can also altomp to update the device drivers comesponding to the driver installation scripts Choose from the list below which drivers you would like to instali F USB connection to Windows CE wceusbsh F USB mess storage usbstor lt Beck Next gt Cancel Select the drivers you want to update wceusbsh and usbstor Tap on the Next button None of the drivers are updated by default To complete the process you must establish U
260. rward remote number hex e ar acknowledged remote number hex e fh forward host number hex e ah acknowledged host number hex ca radio address This is the Cellular Address including session number hex tn host terminal number of session decimal e sts session status hex e typ data stream type hex e msk message mask hex e Q memory address of first message in receive queue i e if 0 then the receive queue is empty e AcQ number of messages that have been sent but not yet acknowledged by the Cellular Master decimal e TXQ number of messages waiting to be sent decimal 6 9 2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen e Press lt CTRL gt ALT lt 0 gt zero to return to the Display menu 152 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 6 10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which an 8525 is operating While some parameters are accessible through the Parameter Manager others can be adjusted through the Windows CE NET Control Panel This section provides a description of all parameters and how to adjust them Press lt CTRL gt ALT 0 zero to work with the Display menu From this startup menu you can launch the Parameters menu along with TESS and or ANSI sessions You can also displa
261. s displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar for example pressing BLUE twice displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar ail 802 11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon al al a dd dd a Y Good Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link Narrow Band Radio Signal Quality anii Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon A l l AN Good Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link The radio signal is now determined when the 8525 receives a message If the unit receives no messages within a second the no signal icon is displayed The signal strength icon shows the following cases No signal 1 to 25 bar 26 to 50 bar 51 to 75 bar and 75 to 100 bar 36 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Audio Indicators ink Link Status gie The Narrow Band radio has three link state icons displayed in the taskbar An uppercase LINK with a green background indicates the radio is powered on and that the unit is online and locked onto a channel A lowercase Link with a yellow background indicates that the radio is powered on but the 8525 is not online or not locked onto a channel A lowercase Link with a yellow background and a red x through it indicates that the radio is not powered on is not online and is not locked onto a channel Blu
262. s are disabled the checkbox is left blank the ORANGE and BLUE keys are locked on when pressed only once they remain on until they are pressed a second time to unlock them EL Note Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on When the ORANGE and BLUE keys are locked on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays them in uppercase characters BLUE KEY and ORANGE KEY If these keys are dis played in lowercase characters in the taskbar you ll know that the Blue Key and the Orange Key are not locked They will become inactive following a key press 5 5 4 Keyboard Macro Keys e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Macros tab Bluetooth Device A Mouse Keyboard Properties Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros Unicode Mapping Scancode Remapping Macro Key Sequence H Storage Stat TekTerm Control Panel Besar AMIA Figure 5 10 Macro Dialogue Box SOB Oh A macro has 200 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys including ENTER lt BKSP gt and DEL lt BLUE gt lt BKSP gt function keys and arrow keys Recording And Saving A Macro You can program up to 12 macro keys e nthe Macro menu highlight a macro ke
263. se the Configure button e Tap on the Name Servers tab ad x E PTIXWLAGS46B1 Settings Ls TP Address Name Servers Make New S WP Address Connection q Name server addresses may be Primary DNS E s automatically assigned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter Secondary DNS Iu uox You can specify additional WINS or DNS resolvers in the Pma wins space provided Secondary WINS amp Start TekTerm J Network Connections PTXWLAGS4681 i GG Figure 2 9 Name Servers Tab The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers The format for these fields is HHH HHH HHH HHH 22 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Advanced Features 2 2 5 Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialogue box e Tap the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab This window lists the available preferred networks 3 t vi File Ed View Advanced Wireless Settings en C E m M Use Windows to configure my wireless settings ll Make New Serial Cabld Windows will connect to these preferred networks Connection on COM2 1 qwertyui Le x Delete Properties Automatically connect to non preferred networks Networks to access all available Start TekTerm Network Connections PrxwLaGs4681 i Sl Figure 2 10 Advanced
264. sional internal scanner 38 One Shot Mode 72 ON For 72 Open network authentication 79 Open Fky Only 208 ORANGE Key 30 order of fields in TESS screen 206 Origin Scroll 196 Output 727 output input fields serial port 203 Output Tmo 220 P pages of Cols TESS 196 of Columns ANSI 82 of Pages ANSI 8 of Rows ANSI 82 of Rows TESS 196 positioning 196 queuing mode 46 reprinting 144 size shape 182 Pages Saved TESS 197 Panning 224 parameters Alpha parameters 55 156 numeric 54 156 saving changes to 756 string entry 755 156 157 Y N boolean 7 54 156 Parity 2 9 Passthru Printing 2 0 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 period ASCII decimal equivalent 200 peripherals defining connections 217 PIN Bluetooth Controls 98 pinouts B PINs Bluetooth devices 7 00 pins enabling for printing 207 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual pivot viewport 227 pocket PC compatibility 63 Port ANSI Telnet Settings 778 Port TESS Connection Type 795 Port 802 IQ v2 227 port pinouts B 7 Port Prefix Bluetooth Controls 702 ports ANSI Connection Type 178 Baud 2 9 Buffer 220 Data Bits 219 Flow Control 2 9 Input tmo 220 Output tmo 220 parameters 2 8 Parity 2 9 Retries 220 serial 203 Serial In Out 203 settings 217 settings tether amp console port 2 7 settings for Tether and console 2 8 Stop Bi
265. sor When this parameter is enabled set to Y the cursor is presented as a flashing block When Block Cursor is set to N the cursor is presented as a flashing underline character Use increment When Use increment is enabled set to Y and the cursor is moved off the display the screen contents shift by the values specified in the X increment and Y increment parameters X increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y Y increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 169 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Split Screen 6 19 1 Split Screen 04 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs A This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one application screen can be displayed at the same time The split screen parameters Type and View IDs are used to tailor the screen view for your needs Type And View IDs The Type parameter determines how a screen will be split The 8525 supports up to four application screens The View IDs parameter determines which application screens will be displayed in each
266. st basic Start Menu items To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options e Tap on the radio button next to Supervisor e Tap the stylus in the Password field and type the Supervisor level password default password is 123456 e Tap on OK you can now access all menu items in the Start Menu and icons in the taskbar Accessing Teklogix Level Security Important The Teklogix security level is reserved for authorized Psion Tek logix personnel only Before you can access Teklogix security level you need to set the security level to Supervisor Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 51 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Security Levels In the Security Level dialogue box see Figure 4 6 on page 51 e Tap on the Configure button Configure Security OK E Show Icons For M Teklogix Supervisor User 1 Allow Teklogix Security Level Figure 4 7 Configuring Security Levels e Tapon the checkbox next to Allow Teklogix Security Level to enable V this option and then tap on OK Security Level O Teklogix Password Set Password Configure Figure 4 8 Security Levels The Teklogix level security is now available in the Security Level dialogue box e Tap on the radio button next to Teklogix To activate this security level you ll need to enter the appropriate Psion Teklogix level password in the Password field Changing A Password EL
267. t in the system and it has been marked for rein stall the Continue button will not become active until Windows has C 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 1 4 Appendix C USB Setup Application Post Installation completed the driver installation and the device is no longer marked for reinstall Only one devnode per device can be unset when the device drivers are finally installed If you indicated that the usbst or driver should be installed the same steps as described above are carried out for usbstor except that the 8525 must be running BooSt Press and hold down the lt SCAN gt lt BLUE gt lt ENTER gt keys for a minimum of 6 seconds to launch the BooSt program Keep in mind that a device running BooSt has a dif ferent hardware ID than when it is running Windows CE NET Post Installation Done Dialogue Box This dialogue box indicates the success or failure of the installation To view the log file tap on the lt Log File gt button To exit the program tap on the lt Exit gt button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 5 of Cols ANSI 182 of Cols TESS 196 of Pages ANSI 181 of Rows ANSI 782 of Rows TESS 196 A accents adding Custom Characters 172 accessories bar code readers connecting 231 acknowledged host number ah 752 acknowledged remote number ar 152 acknowledgements transmitted xa 151 acknowledgements received 151
268. talling usbstor amp wceusbsh inf C 4 launching C updating usbstor amp wceusbsh inf C 2 usbstor inf installing C 4 usbstor inf updating C 2 Use Increment X Increment 7 69 Y Increment 7 69 Useincrement 769 user permissions Exit 168 Font Change 68 Screen Switch 167 User security level 57 V Valid Numerics TESS 208 Variations Code 128 7 9 vehicle installation cables 237 Verify 116 Version 225 Version Scan See 225 version number TESS 143 vertical tab CTRL K 1 89 video attributes 183 207 All Fld Video 207 Blink 783 207 Bold 763 207 16 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Reverse 183 207 Underline 783 View IDs 170 viewport mapping 22 visible fields match 199 V Match Chr 199 volume adjusting 66 VT220 Function keys equivalent Psion Teklogix keyboard Function keys 147 W Warm Reset Shutdown menu 58 warnings 114 warranty 4 wceusbsh inf installing C 4 wceusbsh inf updating C 2 WEC Write Error Code 2 4 Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key network authentication 19 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA network authentication 79 Windows Start Menu See Start Menu 50 Windows CE dialogue box 58 files folders amp programs working with 47 Windows CE navigating in 45 Windows Explorer 53 wireless connection setup 15 Wireless Information Tab 17 Wireless Properties tab 78 worldwide offices 4 WPA network authentication 19 WPA PSK network authentication 79 wrap auto 7
269. te Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support p amp 9 2 3 Hy Mouse V 1 Owner Password PC Power Regional i 4 Th Connection Settings b oo M d 3o J Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp z Start_ F Control Pane un wil SS Figure 5 44 Network And Dial up Connection Icon 3 Select the Make New Connection icon Eie Edi view Advanced Fs 5 8 ex E 2 2 X Serial Cable USB Cable PTXWLAG on COM2 Start TekTerm Network Connections gt i 54 7 Figure 5 45 Creating A GPRS Connection 4 Inthe Make New Connection dialogue box choose Dial Up Connection Enter a name for your GPRS network connection File Edit View E TT meni tia x Type a name for the connection A Al cens network Select the connection type Dial Up Connection O Virtual Private Network PPTP O Direct Connection O Virtual Private Network L2TP O PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Start TekTerm E Connections is E Figure 5 46 Setting Up The Connection Make New Serial Ca Connection on COI 104 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 5 Tap on the Next gt button to display the Modem dialogue box mE sl 2 A GPRS network Make New Serial Ca Connection on CON Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COM1 Haves Compatible on COM1 Hayes Compatible on COM2 Start
270. tead If you ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right To add another ASCII character in the string entry field next to the one you ve already chosen e Type a numeric character for example type the number 7 e Next press the lt BKSP gt key The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters and select another character Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 157 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Saving Changes To Parameters Entering Information In A String Entry Field In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter you can also type text in a string entry field e Type the required text in the string entry field including letters numbers and symbols e Press ENTER to save the text Entering Unicode Values Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium To enter a Unicode value for one time use e Press and hold down the ALT key while typing a four digit decimal value that represents the Unicode character you want to display e Release the ALT key VAN Important If you have a set of Unicode values that you use frequently you may want to create and save them in a pop up window so that you can access them wheneve
271. ter 6 Tekterm Application Screen of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle mount s display Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display EL Note The value in this parameter must be an even number of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display AN Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 8525 memory is reset e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the available options 80 col font 132 col font These parameters are used to set the font size on the screen if the default font is not acceptable An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a vehicle mount can switch to either 80 col font or 132 col font e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys to scroll through the size options for these parameters 182 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Video r 06 Vide
272. ter User Manual 175 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application ANSI Settings Type And Title Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter The Type P field indicates the type of session you will be running The Title parameter should be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator L Note The available options for the Type field are TESS ANSI and None Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the options The Title field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator In addi tion TESS and ANST applications require unique titles so that several different sessions of TESS and ANST can operate simultaneously These titles will appear in startup Display Menu Each session will have its own set of parameters To display the Settings menu for your application position the cursor on Settings and press F1 the NEXT key Before you can access the Settings menu you must first complete the Name and Type fields 6 20 1 ANSI Settings r 04 Ansi Rang Auto Term N see text Terminal 1 1 1024 Host Conn see text Screen see text Xmit Modes see text Kbd Modes see text Edit Modes see text Serial see text Host Char Set see text Anchor View N see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional ANSI information is documented i
273. ter User Manual 53 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Programs 54 This sub menu allows you to choose ActiveSync and Command Prompt and you can access the Internet Explorer installed applications e g Open Tekterm Remote Desktop Connection and Windows Explorer ActiveSync This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt At the prompt you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive Internet Explorer The 8525 is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer consistent with all Windows CE NET devices on the market You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Sett ings gt Control Panel or by double tapping on the desktop icon labelled My Computer and then double tapping on the Control Panel icon Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the 8525 Windows CE NET device Remote Desktop Connection on page 63 provides a website with details about this option Windows Explorer Windows Explorer installed on your 8525 is consistent with all Windows CE NET 4 2 devices You can access this option either from the Start Menu under Programs gt Windows Explorer Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapt
274. ter appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu e Double tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display Returning To The Previous Menu e If the softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen tap the stylus on the PREV previous softkey label e If the softkey labels are not visible you ll have to press F2 the PREV function key 6 11 1 2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video e To decrease the numeric value tap the stylus on the left side of the number To increase the numeric value tap the stylus on the right side of the number Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed 6 1 1 3 Y N Parameters Y N parameters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable a Y N parameter e Tap the stylus on the parameter associated with the Y N value the value will toggle between Y and N 154 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Alpha Parameters Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow gt appears next to the
275. term Application The Tekterm Application 6 1 The Tekterm Application Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers The 8525 includes unique features that support Tekterm a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers 6 Additional Keyboard Functions In addition to the standard keyboard functions see The Keyboard on page 29 Tekterm supports function keys softkeys and macro keys 6 2 1 Function Keys And Softkeys 6 2 1 1 Function Keys The 8525 is equipped with a series of function keys each of which is defined in the application software Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt to lt FI0 gt Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt can be directly accessed by pressing the function keys labelled in yellow along the top of the keyboard No key combination is required Accessing Function Keys FII To lt F20 gt These keys are labelled in orange in the top left corner of the function keys To access these keys press the ORANGE key followed by lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt e To access function key lt F11 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt Fl gt e Press ORANGE F2 to access function key lt F12 gt and so on Accessing Function Keys lt F21 gt To lt F30 gt These keys are labelled in blue in the top right corner of th
276. tery Tether Port RS232 Serial Port Figure 3 2 Ports 3 1 The Internal Backup Battery The 8525 vehicle mount is equipped with an internal battery that will provide backup power to the unit for up to fifteen minutes of normal operation After 15 minutes the unit will shut off to preserve the contents of RAM The backup battery is not user accessible It must be replaced by authorized Psion Teklogix personnel 3 3 Switching The 8525 Vehicle Mount On And Off Switching On The 8525 e Press the lt ENTER ON gt key e When all four LEDs flash orange release the lt ENTER ON gt button A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft Windows CE NET logo appears followed by the startup desktop L Note Ifthe 8525 is in suspend state pressing lt ENTER ON gt key wakes the unit from this state The screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is displayed 28 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keyboard Switching Off The 8525 Important Keep in mind that turning off the 8525 does not result in a complete reboot rather the unit enters a power saving suspend state When the 8525 is turned on from suspend state operation resumes within a few seconds To switch off the 8525 e Press the BLUE key and then press the lt ENTER ON gt key Important Ifthe word BLUE is displayed in uppercase
277. the 8525 Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost However the registry settings are saved 4 5 Using A Dialogue Box A dialogue box like the samples in Figure 4 16 appears when you need to make selections and enter further information Date Time Properties Q Date Time Bluetooth May 2004 CIN Device MTWTEFS 12 58 37 PM r 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 Time Zone 2345 67 8p 9 10 11 12 13 Jus 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 Stylus Remove Storage 58 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Using A Dialogue Box TEKLOGIX f lem Button E eyed to this computer If your network O Specify an IP address does not automatically assign IPS IP addresses ask your network eden administrator for an address Subnet Mask and then type it in the space F provided Default Gateway Textbox Supervisor amp Start Tekrerm PTXWLAGS46B1 Figure 4 16 Navigating Dialogue Boxes Dialogue boxes contain one or more of the following elements Tab A tab separates different elements of a dialogue box Tap on a tab to display the associated information Textbox A textbox requires that you type information Highlight the textbox with the stylus and then type the appropriate information Dropdown This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows n
278. the host or transferred to the console or serial ports This mode is significant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM is disabled SATM When the Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM parameter is disabled set to N the selected areas defined by SSA ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the full contents of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports TIM When the Transfer Termination Mode TTM parameter is disabled set to N the cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the cursor position is ignored EOL chars This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each line in a block transmission If the parameter is not used the rules specified in Transmitted Data Stream are used to determine end of line characters Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 187 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes EOB chars This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each block transmission 6 20 1 4 Kbd Modes BKSP Xmit 05 Kbd Modes Arrow mode Echo mode DEL key Range key PrintScreen key Enter Insert Newline Dis
279. toRep Fn 7 0 63 AutoRep T O 5 0 42255 AutoRep Fn This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode The value represents the number of the function key not the ASCII decimal equivalent After sending this key the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the 8525 To disable AutoRep Fn set the AutoRep T O parameter to zero AutoRep 1 0 This parameter determines the time in seconds between the 8525 unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter A value of zero disables auto reply mode 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features 6 20 2 5 Features r 05 Features Range Printer Any Available Y N Binary print N Y N Queuing Y Y N Lcl Process Y see text Send Mile N Y N Next X N Y N Kbd Locked N Y N Remap Passthru N Y N Disable Beep N Y N Serial see text Printer The value assigned for the Printer parameter determines which port the print command will use The allowable options are Any Available 1st printer 2nd printer 3rd printer 4th printer and Disabled Binary print When this parameter is enabled set to Y the page displayed on the 8525 computer is spooled as is except for trailing white space removal When disabled set to N each line of the page displayed on the vehicle mo
280. ts 2 9 TESS Connection Type 195 Test 220 Tether and Console Port settings 2 7 port settings tether amp console 277 220 position of screen 196 power icon AC 36 Power Management Properties 80 suspend power saving 81 Power Mgmt 167 power up 8525 15 preferred networks 23 prefix serial I O 204 Prefix Char 7 8 121 PREVIOUS key F2 134 PREV key F2 154 155 Printer serial service Bluetooth 99 printing Binary print parameter 201 pages 144 Printer parameter 201 PrintScreen key 790 procedures local 207 process local 745 201 profile creating backup 708 Index profile restoring backup 111 Programs Command Prompt 53 Internet Explorer 53 Remote Desktop Connection 53 Windows Explorer 53 protocol 802 1Q vl 762 Protocol Type 763 punctuation marks accessing SHIFT Key 30 Q memory address of first message in receive queue 752 queue memory address of first message in receive queue Q 752 queue transmissions waiting in TxQ 7 52 queuing enabling disabling next message 202 mode 746 201 pages 146 Queuing parameter 7 45 201 response time improving 146 R ra received acknowledgements 151 radio adding new network connection 78 advanced settings of 23 Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio 227 Bluetooth 97 102 configuring 15 adding a new network connection 18 Ad Hoc 18 authentication network 9 Connect button 17 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 20 Infrastructure 18 Key Index 20 K
281. tus message 143 messages retransmitting 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 152 messages received rm 151 messages transmitted xm 151 milestone 202 Mixed AIAG 206 mnemonics ANSI 792 mode serial I O 203 Model 7000 Brightness 224 modifier keys 29 locking 30 One Shot Mode 72 unlocking 30 Mod 10 Check 778 126 9 Index 10 Mod 10 Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 125 Mod 10 Check 12 of 5 symbology 124 Mod 43 Check 8 moving the display 169 196 MSI Plessey 125 msk message mask 1 52 multiple ANSI sessions 175 applications 175 hosts 145 TESS sessions 175 Multiple Area Transfer Mode MATM 187 N name servers assigning 22 network Ad Hoc 18 connection monitoring 39 control panel settings 226 infrastructure 18 Network addresses 226 network authentication 19 Network Key assigning 20 Newline 790 NEXT B message 145 146 NEXT H message 145 146 NEXT key Fl 134 Next X 202 Null In Fields 2 2 Nulls In Fields 2 5 number of columns ANSI 1 82 of columns TESS 196 of pages ANSI 181 of rows ANSI 182 of rows TESS 196 Terminal ANSI 146 177 Terminal TESS 138 number system digit 122 123 numeric fields Rjct if Alpha 206 numeric parameters 154 156 numeric parameters minimum maximum limits to 154 156 O Off amp On buttons 15 28 offices list 4 off line 8525 using local procedures 745 offset viewport 221 On amp Off button 5 28 One Check Digit 25 one dimen
282. twork name SSID text entry field at the top of this dialogue box The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network Important Keep in mind that the 8525 will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID Ad Hoc And Infrastructure If you are using an Infrastructure network one in which 8525s must pass data through an access point leave the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network blank If you are using an Ad Hoc network a network in which 8525s pass data directly to other 8525s without an access point tap on the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network to enable V Ad Hoc 18 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption prevents others from acciden tally accessing your network If you are nof using encryption you can choose Disabled from the dropdown encryption menu Otherwise leave this field as is Authentication 802 11 supports a number of subtypes of network authentication services Open Shared WPA and WPA PSK Using Open authentication any wireless station can request authentication The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending stati
283. uld not be used unless absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock A CAUTION To reduce risk of electric shock unplug the vehicle mount computer from the DC source before attempting any maintenance or cleaning g Warning Physically disconnect the 8525 from the vehicle battery during battery charging into AC outlet XII Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual INTRODUCTION 1 1 About This Manual e 3 1 2 Text Conventions coso soe 4 oes eee opo a ada os ew 4 1 3 About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 5 1 3 1 Peatures o c4 xk Re gom Ew OE he ww E a xS 5 1 3 2 The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer o o o o o ooo 8 1 3 4 Regulatory Labels o ooo o 9 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual I 1 About This Manual This manual describes how to configure operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix 8525 vehicle mount computer Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the 8525 vehicle mount Chapter 2 Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the 8525 ready for operation Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 describes the 8525 features and provides a description of the keyboard how to navigate in Microsoft Windows CE and so on Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET describes the Microsoft Windows CE desktop an
284. unt is preceded by a linefeed LF and followed by a carriage return CR Queuing This parameter enables and disables queuing mode see Queuing Mode on page 146 It also enables TESS procedures to be loaded into the 8525 This parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between hosts within a TESS session are required Changes to this parameter take effect only after the 8525 is reset Lcl Process Save on Reset The menu item Local Process has a sub menu attached to it Save on Reset When this parameter is enabled set to Y data stored in the 8525 is saved if the unit is reset Local procedures are defined on page 145 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 201 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features Send Mile This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 8525 after a hey_you command Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem TESS User Manual for more information on milestones Next X This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode Kbd Locked This parameter allows you to lock set to Y or unlock set to N the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS When the keyboard is locked the function keys arrow keys and the ENTER key are still functional The 8525 emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked Changes to this parameter take effect only afte
285. uration UPC E Settings 5 9 2 7 UPC E Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E or off to disable it Convert to UPC A Setting this parameter to ON results in a non standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code Include Number ys If this parameter is enabled set to ON the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check When enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum A i Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON Refer to Addendum on page 121 Prefix Suffix Chars Refer to page 122 for details 5 928 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar or off to disable it Field Size Char Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 9 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 or off to disable it 124 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 11 Field Size Char Refer to page 119 for details 5 92 10 Code l Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 or off to disable it Indude Check If Include Chk is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Check Digits This parameter can be set t
286. us Properties il Figure 5 22 Setting Stylus Sensitivity 5 5 5 Touchscreen Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration However if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the directions in the Calibration tab e Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button File view ETT Properties o Double Tap Calibration options Bluetooth If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you Device Em A may need to recalibrate your screen vx Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the 2 center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center Mouse and then lift the stylus To start tap Recalibrate Remove orage ylus SKIGOIX Ota kecal Volume Wireless Programs Manager Scanners Sounds WAN amp jStart TekTerm s Control Panel a Stylus Properties i25 all Figure 5 23 Calibrating The Touchscreen e Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 83 Chapter 5 Configuration Options Disabling The Touchscreen 5 5 5 3 Options Disabling The Touchscreen File View Stylus Properties 2 x Double Tap calibration i Bluetooth E board Device C E 5 Mouse Bional
287. utside the viewport or if the 8525 display changes without the cursor being moved the viewport is re synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor Line Scrolling When Line Scrolling is enabled set to Y the Scan See display is treated as two separate one line by 10 column displays The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line In an application where the cursor skips from one entry field to another the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top line and the next field is displayed at the bottom L Note When this feature is enabled set to Y the Panning option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke Brightness The Brightness parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan Sees scanners equipped with LED light emitting diode displays 224 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport Arrows The Arrows parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan See keyboard Value Function Bright Arrow keys control Scan See display brightness Horiz Arrow keys control Column Offset Vert Arrow keys control Line Offset Table 6 5 Arrow Parameter Options L Note For Horiz and Vert
288. value has been changed and has not yet been saved 6 2 2 Macro Keys Important Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 73 for details about creating macros 8525 vehicle mounts are equipped with a twelve macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys like the ENTER key the lt BKSP gt key any function key and arrow key and so on 134 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Changing The Screen Font Size Macro Keys MI To lt MI2 gt These keys are displayed in blue print across the top row of alpha keys and the first two alpha keys in the second row on the keyboard To access a macro key press the lt BLUE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key For example on a Qwerty keyboard e Press BLUE Q to access macro key M1 e To access M2 press BLUE lt W gt and so on 6 3 Changing The Screen Font Size To cycle through the available screen fonts e Press lt CTRL gt ALT lt F gt 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 8525 display the content can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins into view Normally the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow pressed However if you lock the lt BLUE gt key on you can pan the entire contents
289. w Band Radio kal OK E Info Channel Protocol Power Radio CIS Data Psion Teklogix Inc RA1001 Narrowband Radio DSP 0 3 FPGA 0x1B i Default all Parameters Figure 5 28 Narrow Band Information The Power information in this screen indicates the power of the radio installed in the unit 0 5 or 1 0 W The Serial Number is the identifier for the radio and is used by the protocol when the Auto Radio Address parameter is enabled The CIS Card Information Structure Data is manufacturer information describing the PC Card installed in the 8525 DSP x x FPGA OxNN indicates the firmware revision of the radio s DSP x x and FPGA OxNN where x x and NN represent actual revision numbers Statistics Screen e Tap on the Statistics button to display the Protocol Statistics screen These statistics are updated every second while the dialogue box is displayed Protocol Low Level l cq100 chi sc 0 a m 6 xm F 0 xf ra 0 xi rp 0 xr ooo pt 0 rssi 2667 Zero Statistics 86 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab Figure 5 29 Protocol Statistics The following table provides a brief description of these statistics Statistic Description Channel quality See the description of the Channel Switch Speed parame eq ter in the channel tab for more information on how cq affects channel switching see
290. xOk Message buffers successfully transmitted TxEr Message buffers which failed to transmit CD Number of carrier detect changes detected Coll Number of collisions detected TxD Actual difference in time in RTC ticks between when the most recent trans mit with timestamp was scheduled to start and when it actually started TxMD Maximum Tx D value RxX Number of extra characters received for last received message due to delay in host reporting back actual body size RxMx Maximum Rx X value MChg Number of completed mode changes Table 5 2 Low Level Statistics Descriptions Default All Parameters e Tap on the Default all Parameters button to return all registry parameters to default values When this button is pressed a screen appears asking if you re sure you want to return all parameters to their default values e Tap on the Yes button to return values to their default settings KL Note This button does not default the radio parameters set under the Nadio tab Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab 5 5 7 2 Channel Tab Paro Band Radio O O O O Info Charnel Protocol Power Redio Channel Humber al y f Power Up Channel Chamel Enable Lis p gt Channel Seatch Spaced Sn Fast r Channel salaction Z Parud ekee esta Figure 5 31 Channel Tab Channel Number This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the 8525 The
291. xtensible Authentication Protocol This dropdown menu lists the EAP types available on your system The items in this dropdown menu will vary depending on your network setup Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Assigning An IP Address a Certificate By selecting the Properties button you will be able to select a Certificate Certificate Assignment on page 84 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network 6 Saving and exiting the radio setup Once you have completed your configuration press lt ENTER gt or tap on OK The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network The radio will search for the SSID and will compare the WEP and authentication information you specified If there is a match between your 8525 settings and the access point settings the 8525 will communicate on the network through the access point 2 2 3 Assigning An IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address File Edit View ASIN 2 X sl Le IP Information wireless Statistics wireless Information Make New Serial Cabld Internet Protocol TCP IP Connection on COM2 Address Type DHCP IP Address 10 132 100 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 10 132 0 1 i Renew Details
292. y amp Bg key is provided automatically Key Index fields Enable 802 1X authentication Network Key This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point e To assign a Network key tap the stylus in the checkbox next to The key is provided automatically to remove the check mark V disabling this option sl Network name SSID This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Encryption WEP Authentication Open y Make New Serial d Connection on CO amp Start fTekTerm amp Network Connections PTXWLAGS46B1 Wi p Figure 2 6 Accessing Network Key And Key Index Key Index This field is used to identify the WEP key Enter a value from 1 to 4 Enable 802 1x authentication 802 1 X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network whether wired or wireless A security protocol packet such as TLS or MDS encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802 1x standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu next to the EAP option e To activate 802 1X tap on the checkbox next to Enable 802 1x authentica tion and press the SPACE key to enable V it EAP Type E
293. y applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately To access the Windows CE NET Control Panel e Use the stylus to tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar to display the Start Menu Tap on Set t ings gt Control Panel Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 63 The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your 8525 Q0 0D 2 b 9 9 Be Leli gt Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support cA ap 3 Mouse Narrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional i Radio Dial up Co Connection Settings o O Ys ill o L Remove Storage System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp ee fh er _ _ _ do Start Control Panel Y MATES Figure 5 1 Control Panel 5 4 Control Panel Icons The Windows CE NET Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your 8525 22 Date Time _ Date Time Allows you to set the current Month Date Time and Time Zone on your unit A Display Changes the appearance window colour scheme on the unit desktop This Display applet can also be used to adjust the backlight level gt Keyboard Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backl
294. y number for example macro to assign a macro to macro key lt M1 gt Tap on the Record Macro button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 73 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys A message screen is displayed instructing you to Please Enter Key Strokes Bluetooth Macro Key Sed please Enter Key Strokes TEE EE To stop recording press S CTRL ALT Enter Mouse e Storage E Start 1 TekTerm 3 Control Panel Keyboard Properties x El i 07 Figure 5 11 Recording A Macro e Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro L Note Tap on the Stop Recording button at any time to suspend the process When you ve finished recording your macro sequence press the key sequence lt CTRL gt ALT ENTER A new screen displays the macro sequence you created The Save Macro button is highlighted e Tap on the Save Macro button L Note If you want to discard the macro you ve just created tap on the Discard Macro button Executing A Macro To execute a macro e Press the macro key to which you ve assigned the macro For example if you created a macro for macro key 1 press lt M1 gt to execute the macro Deleting A Macro To delete a macro e In the Macros tab tap on the macro number you want to delete e Tap on th
295. y the Radio Statistics screen m 01 Display Menu 4 A Parameters B TESS E ANSI AN Note Aside from the Parameters menu all other applications listed in the Display Menu are created in the Applications menu Refer to Appli cations on page 175 for details To launch an application either type the letter to the left of the application you want to use or tap the stylus on the item For example to display the Parameters menu e Type the letter a or e Tap the stylus on the Parameters item EL Note To return to the Display Menu press F2 the Previous key 6 11 Working With Menus The 8525 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values you can either use the keyboard or you can select items by tapping a stylus on the screen There are four types of parameters numeric Y N alpha and string entry Some menus have sub menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialogue box to make adjustments Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 153 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus Important Depending on the method you use when working with menus N review either Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus on page 154 or Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus on page 155 6 11 1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 6 11 1 1 Sub Menus The charac
296. ystem will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously Typically when both radios operate in the 8525 at the same time they cannot transmit simultaneously this has a negative impact on overall system throughput To minimize the impact on the backbone 802 11b network Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates such as printers and scanners Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 231 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories GPS Unit Bluetooth peripherals are configured using the Bluetooth control panel applet Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 98 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the 8525 host 1 3 GPS Unit The 8525 can support an optional GPS unit This unit a Garmin GPS 35HVS TLX PN 30969 is a complete GPS receiver and antenna contained in a small water resistant package The Garmin GPS 35HVS can track up to 12 satellites at a time while providing fast time to first fix and one second navigation updates The GPS unit was designed to be used in conjunction with the Psion Teklogix Powered Sled Model 7937B the Lithium Ion Battery Pack PN 20605 003 and the Psion Teklogix Port Replicator TLX PN 21655 The GPS unit plugs directly into the Port Replicator which supplies the GPS unit with power from

8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents